Allied Telesis Switch VERSION 543 26 User Manual

network {<ip-prefix/length>|

This command enables a BGP or BGP4+ routing process, which

places the router in Router Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

<ip-network-addr>} [mask

This command flags an IPv4 network as local to this

autonomous system and enters it to the BGP table.

<network-mask>] [route-map

<route-map-name>] [backdoor]

awplus(config-router)#

This command flags an IPv6 network as local to this

autonomous system and enters it to the BGP4+ table.

network {<ipv6-prefix/length>|

<ipv6-network-addr>} [route-map

<route-map-name>]

How to configure BGP and BGP4+ Neighbors

Like other EGPs, BGP must completely understand the relationships it has with its

neighbors. Therefore, this task is required.

BGP supports two kinds of neighbors: internal and external. Internal neighbors are in the

same autonomous system; external neighbors are in different autonomous systems.

Normally, external neighbors are adjacent to each other and share a subnet, while internal

neighbors may be anywhere in the same autonomous system.

To configure BGP neighbors, use the following command in Router Configuration mode:

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor <neighborid> remote-as

This command specifies a BGP neighbor.

<as-number>

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

1.12

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Introduction

BGP and BGP4+ Neighbor Route Filtering

You can filter BGP and BGP4+ advertisements in two ways with neighbors:

■

Use autonomous system path filters, as with the ip as-path access-list (BGP and

BGP4+) Global Configuration mode command and the neighbor filter-list (BGP and

BGP4+) Router Configuration mode command

■

Use access or prefix lists, as with the neighbor distribute-list (BGP and BGP4+)

Router Configuration mode command.

If you want to restrict routing information that is learned or advertised, you can filter BGP

routing updates to and from neighbors. You can define an access list or a prefix list and

apply it to the updates.

To filter BGP routing updates for IPv4 routes, use the command below in Router

Configuration mode:

awplus(config-router)#

distribute-list <access-list>

{in|out}

This command filters BGP routing updates to and from

neighbors as specified in an access list for IPv4 routers in

Router Configuration mode.

To filter BGP4+ routing updates for IPv6 routes, use the command below in Address Family

Configuration mode:

awplus(config-router-af)#

ip as-path access-list (BGP and

distribute-list <access-list>

{in|out}

This command filters BGP routing updates to and from

neighbors as specified in an access list for IPv6 routes in

Address Family Configuration mode.

BGP and BGP4+ Path Filtering by Neighbor

You can specify an access list filter on both incoming and outbound updates based on the

BGP autonomous system paths. Each filter is an access list based on regular expressions.

To specify the access list filter, define an autonomous system path access list and apply it

to updates to and from particular neighbors.

To configure BGP path filtering, use the following commands starting in Global

Configuration mode:

awplus(config)#

This command defines a BGP-related access list.

This command enters Router configuration mode

BGP4+)

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-router)#

This command establishes a BGP filter for an IPv4 path in the

Router Configuration mode.

filter-list <listname> {in|out}

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

1.13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Introduction

To configure BGP4+ path filtering, use the following commands starting in Global

Configuration mode:

awplus(config)#

ip as-path access-list (BGP and

BGP4+)

This command defines a BGP-related access list.

awplus(config)#

This command enters Router Configuration mode

address-family ipv6 [unicast]

awplus(config-router)#

This command enters Address Family Configuration mode

awplus(config-router-af)#

This command establishes a BGP4+ filter for an IPv6 path in the

Address Family Configuration mode.

filter-list <listname> {in|out}

How to disable next hop processing for BGP or

BGP4+ updates

You can configure the software to disable next hop processing for BGP and BGP4+

updates to a neighbor.

For BGP, to disable next hop processing and provide a specific address to be used instead

of the next hop address, use the command below in Router Configuration mode:

awplus(config-router)#

next-hop-self

This command disables next hop processing on BGP updates to

an IPv4 neighbor in Router Configuration mode.

For BGP4+, to disable next hop processing and provide a specific address to be used

instead of the next hop address, use the command below in Address Family Configuration

mode:

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor <neighborid> route-map

next-hop-self

This command disables next hop processing on BGP4+ updates

to an IPv6 neighbor in Address Family Configuration mode.

Configuring this command causes the current router to advertise its peering address as

the next hop for the specified neighbor. Therefore, other BGP neighbors will forward to it

packets for that address.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

1.14

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Introduction

How to use Route Maps for BGP or BGP4+ updates

You can use a route map on a per-neighbor basis to filter updates and modify various

attributes. A route map can be applied to either inbound or outbound updates. Only the

routes that pass the route map are sent or accepted in updates.

Note that community based matching requires the ip community-list (BGP and BGP4+)

Global Configuration command.

See the section BGP Community Filtering for more information. See also the related

route-map commands that are included in the BGP and BGP4+ Commands chapter of

this Supplement: set community (Route Map) and match community (Route Map).

For BGP, to apply a route map to incoming and outgoing IPv4 routes, use the command

below in the Router Configuration mode:

awplus(config-router)#

This command applies a route map to incoming or outgoing

IPv4 routes in the Router Configuration mode.

<mapname> {in|out}

For BGP4+, to apply a route map to incoming and outgoing IPv6 routes, use the following

command in Address Family Configuration mode:

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor <neighborid> route-map

<mapname> {in|out}

This command applies a route map to incoming or outgoing

IPv6 routes in the Address Family Configuration mode.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

1.15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Introduction

BGP and BGP4+ Peer Groups

Often, in a BGP speaker, many neighbors are configured with the same update policies.

Neighbors with the same update policies can be grouped into peer groups to simplify

configuration and, more importantly, to make updating more efficient.

Three steps to configure a BGP peer group, described in following sections, are as below:

1. How to create a Peer Group for BGP

2. How to assign options to the created Peer Group

3. How to make neighbors members of a Peer Group

You can disable a BGP peer or peer group without removing all the configuration

information using the neighbor shutdown (BGP and BGP4+) Router Configuration

mode command.

Note the steps differ slightly for BGP4+ peer groups. First you create a peer group in Global

Configuration mode. Next you activate the peer group in Address Family Configuration

mode, not Router Configuration mode. Then you assign options to the created peer group

in Address Family Configuration mode, not Router Configuration mode as used for BGP.

How to create a Peer Group for BGP

To create a BGP peer group, use the following command in Router Configuration mode:

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor peer-group (create a

peer-group) (BGP and BGP4+)

This command creates a BGP peer group.

How to assign options to the created Peer Group

After you create a peer group, you configure the peer group with neighbor commands. By

default, members of the peer group inherit all the configuration options of the peer

group. Members can also be configured to override the options that do not affect

outbound updates.

Peer group members will always inherit the following attributes: minimum-

advertisement-interval, next-hop-self, out-route-map, out-filter-list, out-dist-list, remote-

as (if configured), version, and update-source. All the peer group members will inherit

changes made to the peer group.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

1.16

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Introduction

To assign configuration options to an individual neighbor, specify any of the following

commands using the IP address as the <neighborid>. To assign the options to a peer

group, specify any of the commands using the peer group name as the <neighborid>.

Use the following commands in Router Configuration mode as needed.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor <neighborid> remote-as

This command specifies a BGP neighbor.

<as-number>

awplus(config-router)#

description <description>

This command associates a description with a neighbor.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor {<neighborid>}

default-originate [route-map

<routemap-name>]

This command allows a BGP speaker (the local router) to send

the default route 0.0.0.0 to a neighbor for use as a default route.

awplus(config-router)#

send-community {both|extended|

standard}

This command specifies that the community attribute be sent

to the neighbor at this IP address.

awplus(config-router)#

update-source <interface>

This command allows iBGP sessions to use any operational

interface for TCP connections.

awplus(config-router)#

ebgp-multihop [<count>]

This command allows BGP sessions, even when the neighbor is

not on a directly connected segment. The multihop session is

not established if the only route to the address of the multihop

peer is the default route (0.0.0.0).

awplus(config-router)#

advertisement-interval <time>

This command sets the minimum interval between sending

BGP routing updates.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor <neighborid> weight

maximum-prefix <maximum>

This command limits the number of prefixes allowed from a

neighbor.

awplus(config-router)#

This command specifies a weight for all routes from a neighbor.

awplus(config-router)#

distribute-list <access-list>

{in|out}

This command filters BGP routing updates to and from

neighbors, as specified in an access list..

awplus(config-router)#

filter-list <listname> {in|out}

This command establishes a BGP filter.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

1.17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Introduction

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor <neighborid> version

next-hop-self

This command disables next hop processing on the BGP

updates to a neighbor.

awplus(config-router)#

This command specifies the BGP version to use when

communicating with a neighbor.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor {<ip-address>|

<peer-group-name>} password

This command starts MD5 authentication on a TCP connection

to a BGP peer. You can enter a case-sensitive password of up to

25 characters. The string can contain any alphanumeric

characters.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor <neighborid> route-map

<mapname> {in|out}

This command applies a route map to incoming or outgoing

routes.

awplus(config-router)#

soft-reconfiguration inbound

This command configures the software to start storing received

updates.

If a peer group is not configured with a remote-as attribute, the members can be

configured with the neighbor remote-as (BGP and BGP4+) command in Router

Configuration mode. This command allows you to create peer groups containing external

BGP (eBGP) neighbors.

You can customize inbound policies for peer group members (using a distribute list, a

route map, or a filter list) because one identical copy of an update is sent to every member

of a group. Neighbor options for outgoing updates cannot be customized for peer groups.

External BGP (eBGP) peers must reside on a directly connected network. But you may want

to change this to test BGP or BGP4+. You can do this by specifying the neighbor ebgp-

multihop (BGP and BGP4+) command in Router Configuration mode. Members of a peer

group can pass routes from one member of the peer group to another. For example, if

router B is peering with routers A and C, router B can pass routes from router A to router C.

For Internal BGP (iBGP) peers, you may want to allow BGP or BGP4+ connections to stay up

if any interface is used. To enable this configuration, configure a loopback interface and

assign it an IPv4 or an IPv6 address. Next, configure the BGP or BGP4+ update source to be

the loopback interface. Then configure your neighbor to use the address on the loopback

interface. Now the iBGP session will be up as long as there is a route on any interface.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

1.18

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Introduction

How to configure authentication for BGP Peering Sessions

You can configure authentication between two BGP peers, meaning that each segment

sent on the TCP connection between the peers is verified. Authentication must be

configured with the same password on both BGP peers; otherwise, the connection

between them will not be made. Configuring authentication causes the software to

generate and check the MD5 digest of every segment sent on the TCP connection. If

authentication is invoked and a segment fails authentication, then an error message will

be displayed in the console.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor {<ip-address>|

<peer-group-name>} password

This command starts MD5 authentication on a TCP connection

to a BGP peer. You can enter a case-sensitive password of up to

25 characters.

When configuring authentication, you can enter a case-sensitive password of up to 25

characters.The string can contain any alphanumeric characters, including spaces. A

password cannot be configured in the number-space-anything format. The space after the

number can cause authentication to fail.

How to make neighbors members of a Peer Group

To configure a BGP neighbor to be a member of a BGP peer group, use the following

command in Router Configuration mode, using the same peer group name:

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor <ipv6-addr> peer-group

This command makes a BGP neighbor a member of the peer

group.

<peer-group>

How to disable a Peer or Peer Group

To disable an existing BGP neighbor or neighbor peer group, use the following command

in Router Configuration mode:

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor <neighborid> shutdown

This command shuts down or disables a BGP neighbor or peer

group.

To enable a previously existing neighbor or neighbor peer group that had been disabled

using the neighbor shutdown (BGP and BGP4+) command in Router Configuration

mode, use the following command in Router Configuration mode:

awplus(config-router)#

no neighbor <neighborid>

shutdown

This command enables a BGP neighbor or peer group.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

1.19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Introduction

BGP and BGP4+ Prefix Lists

Prefix lists can be used as an alternative to access lists in many BGP or BGP4+ route

filtering commands. The advantages of using IPv4 or IPv6 prefix lists are as follows:

■

More of a performance improvement in loading and route lookup of large lists.

Support for updates. Filtering using access lists does not support updates.

The command-line interface to use access lists to filter BGP updates is more difficult.

More flexibility

Before using a prefix list in a BGP or BGP4+ command, first set up the prefix list, and assign

sequence numbers to entries in the prefix list.

BGP and BGP4+ filtering by prefix lists involves matching the prefixes of IPv4 or IPv6 routes

with those listed in the prefix list. When there is a match, the route is used. Whether a

prefix is permitted or denied is based upon these rules:

■

An empty prefix list permits all prefixes.

An implicit deny is assumed if a given prefix does not match any entries of a prefix list.

The router begins the search at the top of the prefix list, with the sequence number 1.

Once a match or deny occurs, the router need not go through the rest of the prefix list.

For efficiency, add the most common matches or denies near the top of the list, using the

seq parameter in the ip prefix-list (IPv4 Prefix List) and ipv6 prefix-list (IPv6 Prefix

List) Global Configuration mode commands. The show ip prefix-list (IPv4 Prefix List)

command and the show ipv6 prefix-list (IPv6 Prefix List) command output includes

sequence numbers.

Sequence numbers are generated automatically unless you disable automatic generation.

If you disable the automatic generation of sequence numbers, you need to specify the

sequence number for each entry with the seq parameter of the ip prefix-list (IPv4 Prefix

List) and ipv6 prefix-list (IPv6 Prefix List) Global Configuration mode commands.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

1.20

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Introduction

How to create and configure a Prefix List for BGP or

BGP4+

To create a prefix list for BGP, use the following command in Global Configuration mode.

Note you can add individual prefix list entries to a defined prefix list as well.

awplus(config)#

ip prefix-list <list-name>

This command creates an IPv4 prefix list with the name

specified for the <list-name>parameter. To create a prefix

list you must enter at least one permit or deny clause. Once an

IPv4 prefix list is created, this command creates a prefix list

entry, and assigns a sequence number to the IPv4 prefix list

entry.

[seq <1-429496725>] {deny|

permit} {any|<ip-prefix>} [ge

<0-32>] [le <0-32>]

awplus(config)#

ipv6 prefix-list <list-name>

[seq <1-429496725>] {deny|

permit} {any|<ipv6-prefix>} [ge

<0-128>] [le <0-128>]

This command creates an IPv6 prefix list with the name

specified for the <list-name>parameter. To create a prefix

list you must enter at least one permit or deny clause. Once an

IPv6 prefix list is created, this command creates a prefix list

entry and assigns a sequence number to the IPv6 prefix list

entry.

The optional ge and le keywords can be used to specify the range of the prefix length to

be matched for prefixes that are more specific than the network/length parameter. An

exact match is assumed when neither ge nor le is specified.

You can specify sequence values for prefix list entries in any increments you want. If you

specify the sequence values in increments of 1, you cannot insert additional entries into

the prefix list. If you choose very large increments, you could run out of sequence values.

How to delete Prefix List Entries

To remove a prefix list, and optionally specific entries, use the following commands as

appropriate in Global Configuration mode:

awplus(config)#

no ip prefix-list <list-name>

This command removes an IPv4 prefix list with the name

specified for the required <list-name> parameter and the

sequence number specified in the range <1-429496725>.

[seq <1-429496725>]

awplus(config)#

no ipv6 prefix-list <list-name>

[seq <1-429496725>]

This command removes an IPv6 prefix list with the name

specified for the <list-name> parameter and the sequence

number specified in the range <1-429496725>.

The sequence number of an entry is optional when you delete the prefix list entry.

If you omit the sequence number then all entries are deleted for the prefix list.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

1.21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Introduction

How to display IPv4 and IPv6 Prefix Entries

To display information about IPv4 and IPv6 prefix tables, prefix table entries, the policy

associated with a node, or specific information about an entry, use the following

commands in Privileged Exec mode as appropriate:

awplus#

show ip prefix-list [<name>|

This command displays information about IPv4 prefix lists.

This command displays information about IPv6 prefix lists.

detail|summary]

awplus#

show ipv6 prefix-list [<name>|

detail|summary]

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

1.22

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Introduction

BGP and BGP4+ Route Dampening

Route dampening is a BGP and BGP4+ feature designed to minimize the propagation of

flapping routes across a network. A route is considered to be flapping when it is

repeatedly available, then unavailable, then available, then unavailable, etc.

Consider a network with three BGP autonomous systems: autonomous system 1,

autonomous system 2, and autonomous system 3. If the route to network A in

autonomous system 1 flaps, and is unavailable without route dampening, the eBGP

neighbor of autonomous system 2 sends a withdraw message to autonomous system 2.

The router in autonomous system 2 sends the withdraw message to autonomous system

3. When a route to network A appears, autonomous system 1 sends an advertisement

message to autonomous system 2, which sends it to autonomous system 3.

If the route to network A repeatedly becomes unavailable, then available, many

withdrawal and advertisement messages are sent. This is a problem in a network

connected to the Internet since route flapping in the Internet often involves many routes.

The route dampening feature minimizes the flapping problem as follows. If the route to

network A flaps, then the router in autonomous system 2, with route dampening enabled,

assigns network A a penalty of 1000 and moves it to the history state.

The router in autonomous system 2 continues to advertise the status of the route to

neighbors. When the route flaps so the penalty exceeds the limit, the router stops

advertising the route to network A, so the route becomes dampened.

The penalty placed on network A is reduced until the limit is reached, when the route is

advertised. At half the limit, dampening information for a route to network A is removed.

The below terms are used for BGP and BGP4+ route dampening:

■

Flap—A route is available, then unavailable, or vice versa.

History state—After a route flaps once, it is assigned a penalty and put into history

state, meaning the router does not have the best path, based on historical

information.

■

Penalty—Each time a route flaps, the router configured for route dampening in

another autonomous system assigns the route a penalty of 1000. Penalties are

cumulative. The penalty for the route is stored in the BGP routing table until the

penalty exceeds the suppress limit. At that point, the route state changes from history

to damp.

■

Damp state—In this state, the route has flapped so often that the router will not

advertise this route to BGP neighbors.

Suppress limit—A route is suppressed when its penalty exceeds this limit. The

default value is 2000.

Half-life—Once the route has been assigned a penalty, the penalty is decreased by

half after the half-life period (which is 15 minutes by default). The process of reducing

the penalty happens every 5 seconds.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

1.23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Introduction

How to enable BGP and BGP4+ Route Dampening

To enable BGP route dampening, use the command below in Router Configuration mode:

awplus(config)#

This command enters Router Configuration mode

awplus(config-router)#

bgp dampening

This command enables BGP route dampening in Router

Configuration mode.

To enable BGP4+ route dampening, use the command below in Address Family

Configuration mode:

awplus(config)#

This command enters Router Configuration mode

address-family ipv6 [unicast]

awplus(config-router)#

This command enters Address Family Configuration mode

awplus(config-router-af)#

bgp dampening

This command enables BGP4+ route dampening in Address

Family Configuration mode.

How to monitor BGP and BGP4+ Route

Dampening

You can monitor the flaps of all the paths that are flapping. The statistics will be deleted

once the route is not suppressed and is stable for at least one half-life. To display flap

statistics, use the following show commands in Privileged Exec mode as needed:

awplus#

show ip bgp dampening

{dampened-paths|

flap-statistics|parameters}

This command displays BGP flap statistics for all IPv4 paths

when you apply the flap-statistics parameter.

awplus#

show bgp ipv6 dampening

{dampened-paths|

flap-statistics|parameters}

This command displays BGP4+ flap statistics for all IPv6 paths

when you apply the flap-statistics parameter.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

1.24

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Introduction

Once a route is dampened, you can display BGP route dampening information, including

the time remaining before the dampened routes will be unsuppressed. To display the

information, use the following command in Privileged Exec mode:

awplus#

show ip bgp dampening

{dampened-paths|

flap-statistics|parameters}

This command displays BGP route dampening information for

all IPv4 paths when you apply the dampened-paths

parameter.

awplus#

show bgp ipv6 dampening

{dampened-paths|

flap-statistics|parameters}

This command displays BGP4+ route dampening information

for all IPv6 paths when you apply the dampened-paths

parameter.

To clear BGP flap statistics (thus making it less likely that the IPv4 route will be dampened),

use the following command in Privileged Exec mode :

awplus#

clear ip bgp flap-statistics

[<ip-address>|<ip-address/m>]

This command clears BGP flap statistics for all IPv4 routes.

To clear BGP dampening statistics for IPv4 routes, use the following command in

Privileged Exec mode:

awplus#

clear ip bgp dampening

[<ip-address>|<ip-address/m>]

This command clears BGP dampening statistics for all IPv4

routes.

To clear BGP4+ flap statistics (thus making it less likely that the IPv6 route will be

dampened), use the following command in Privileged Exec mode :

awplus#

clear bgp ipv6 flap-statistics

This command clears BGP4+ flap statistics for all IPv6 routes.

[<ipv6-addr>|<ipv6-addr/prefix-

length>]

To clear BGP4+ dampening statistics for IPv6 routes, use the following command in

Privileged Exec mode:

awplus#

clear bgp ipv6 dampening

[<ipv6-addr>|<ipv6-addr/prefix-

length>]

This command clears BGP4+ dampening statistics for all IPv6

routes.

The flap statistics for a route are also cleared when a BGP or BGP4+ peer is reset. Although

the reset withdraws the route, there is no penalty applied, even if route flap dampening is

enabled.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

1.25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Introduction

BGP and BGP4+ Synchronization

IGP synchronisation is a feature that is specifically required in the case where routing

information is ‘transiting’ through an AS. That is, when:

■

A BGP router on one side of the AS learns routes from external ASs by eBGP.

This router passes the routes across the AS by iBGP to a BGP router on the other side

of the network (passing through several IGP routers on the way, which simply pass on

the iBGP updates).

■

The BGP router on the other side of the network then sends the routes by eBGP to

other external ASs.

The problem that can arise in this situation comes about because the iBGP session

effectively tunnels route information across the AS, but packets destined to any of those

routes have to cross the AS hop by hop.

If iBGP tunnels route information across the AS faster than the AS's IGP can pass the route

information to all routers in between, then we end up with a situation where the BGP

routers (and other ASs) know about routes that some of the IGP routers in the middle of

the transit AS have not learnt yet. So, packets that are routed from an external AS into the

transit AS may end up being dropped or misdirected somewhere in the middle of the AS

when they arrive at an IGP router that has not yet learnt all the transiting routes.

To avoid this problem, we need to tell iBGP routers that even if they receive routes via the

iBGP ‘express tunnel’, they must wait until the routes have also been received via the more

pedestrian iBGP hop-by-hop method before the routes can be passed on to eBGP

neighbors in other ASs.

This process of forcing a router to wait until a route has been learnt by IGP as well as iBGP

is call IGP synchronisation. In other words, the routes that the router has learnt by iBGP

must match up with the routes that it has learnt by IGP. Once a route has achieved this

sync-up, it is then OK to advertise it on to eBGP neighbors.

IGP synchronization is disabled by default. It does not need to be enabled in an AS where

there are no iBGP connections, or in an AS where all the internal route advertising is done

by iBGP (i.e., when there is no other IGP in use in the AS).

To enable BGP synchronization for IPv4 routes, use the command below in the

Router Configuration mode:

awplus(config-router)#

synchronization

This command enables synchronization between BGP and an

IGP for IPv4 routes in Router Configuration mode.

To enable BGP4+ synchronization for IPv6 routes, use the command below in the

Address Family Configuration mode:

awplus(config-router-af)#

synchronization

This command enables synchronization between BGP4+ and

an IGP for IPv6 routes in Address Family Configuration mode.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

1.26

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Introduction

BGP and BGP4+ Weights

A weight is a number that you can assign to a route so that you can control the route

selection process. The administrative weight is local to the router. A weight can be a

number from 0 to 65535. If you have particular neighbors that you want to prefer for most

of your traffic, you can assign a higher weight to all routes learned from that neighbor.

To assign a weight to a BGP route, use the following commands in Router Configuration

mode:

awplus(config)#

This command enters Router Configuration mode

neighbor <neighborid> weight

awplus(router-config)#

This command adds a weight to a BGP route specified in the

required <neighborid> parameter.

To assign a weight to a BGP4+ route, use the following commands in Address Family

Configuration mode:

awplus(config)#

This command enters Router Configuration mode

address-family ipv6 [unicast]

awplus(config-router)#

This command enters Address Family Configuration mode

awplus(router-config-af)#

neighbor <neighborid> weight

This command adds a weight to a BGP4+ route specified in the

required <neighborid> parameter.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

1.27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Introduction

BGP and BGP4+ Aggregate Addresses

CIDR (Classless Inter-Domain Routing) enables you to create aggregate routes to minimize

the size of routing tables. CIDR is a routing method supported by BGP and BGP4+ that is

based on route aggregation. CIDR allows a router to group routes together to minimize

the amount of routing information carried. Several IP networks appear as a single network

to networks outside of those grouped together

You can configure aggregate routes in BGP or BGP4+ either by redistributing an aggregate

route into BGP or BGP4+ or by using the BGP and BGP4+ Aggregation feature. An

aggregate address is added to the BGP table if at least one entry is in the BGP table.

To create an IPv4 aggregate address in the BGP routing table, use the following command

in the Router Configuration mode:

awplus(config-router)#

aggregate-address <ip-addr/m>

{summary-only|as-set}

This command creates an aggregate IPv4 route entry in the BGP

routing table. This entry will cause BGP to advertise IPv4

summary addresses only, if the summary-only parameter is

applied. This entry will cause BGP to generate autonomous

system set path information, if the the as-set parameter is

applied.

To create an IPv6 aggregate address in the BGP4+ routing table, use the following

command in the Address Family Configuration mode:

awplus(config-router-af)#

aggregate-address <ipv6-addr/

prefix-length> {summary-only|

as-set}

This command creates an aggregate IPv6 route entry in the

BGP4+ routing table. This entry will cause BGP4+ to advertise

IPv6 summary addresses only, if the summary-only parameter

is applied. This entry will cause BGP4+ to generate autonomous

system set path information, if the the as-set parameter is

applied.

How to enable and disable Automatic

Summarization

When a subnet is redistributed from an IGP to BGP, network routes are added to routing

tables. By default, automatic summarization is disabled. To enable automatic network

number summarization, use the following command in Router Configuration mode:

awplus(config-router)#

auto-summary

This command enables automatic network summarization.

To disable automatic network number summarization, use the following command in

Router Configuration mode:

awplus(config-router)#

no auto-summary

This command disables automatic network summarization.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

1.28

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Introduction

BGP and BGP4+ monitoring

You can remove all contents of a particular cache, table, or database. You also can display

specific statistics. The following sections describe each of these tasks.

How to clear BGP and BGP4+ tables

You can remove all contents of a particular table. Clearing a table may be needed when

the contents of the table have become invalid. To clear tables for BGP and BGP4+, use the

following commands in Privileged Exec mode, as needed:

awplus#

clear ip bgp <ipv4-addr>

This command resets a specified BGP IPv4 connection.

[in [prefix-filter]|out|soft

[in|out]]

This command resets all BGP IPv4 connections by clearing all BGP peers:

awplus#

clear ip bgp *

This command resets all BGP IPv4 connections.

This command resets all BGP IPv4 and BGP4+ IPv6 connections by clearing all BGP and

BGP4+ peers:

awplus#

clear bgp *

This command resets all BGP IPv4 and BGP4+ IPv6 connections.

These commands remove all members of a BGP or BGP4+ peer group respectively:

awplus#

clear bgp peer-group

<peer-group>

This command removes all members of a BGP peer group.

[in [prefix-filter]|out|soft

[in|out]]

awplus#

clear ip bgp peer-group <peer-

name>

This command removes all members of a BGP peer group.

This command removes all members of a BGP4+ peer group.

awplus#

clear bgp ipv6 peer-group

<peer-name>

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

1.29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Introduction

How to display BGP and BGP4+ statistics

You can display specific statistics such as the contents of BGP routing tables.

Information provided can be used to determine resource utilization and solve network

problems. You can also display information about node reachability and discover the

routing path that the packets of your device are taking through the network.

To display various routing statistics, use the following commands in Privileged Exec mode,

as needed:

awplus#

show ip bgp prefix-list <list>

This command displays peer groups and peers not in peer

groups to which the prefix has been advertised for BGP. It also

displays prefix attributes, like next hop and local prefix.

awplus#

show bgp ipv6 prefix-list

<list>

This command displays peer groups and peers not in peer

groups to which the prefix has been advertised for BGP4+. It

also displays prefix attributes, like next hop and local prefix.

awplus#

show ip bgp cidr-only

This command displays all BGP routes that contain subnet and

supernet network masks.

awplus#

show ip bgp community [<type>]

[exact-match]

This command displays routes that belong to the specified

communities for BGP.

awplus#

show ip bgp community-list

<listname> [exact-match]

This command displays routes that are permitted by the

community list for BGP.

awplus#

show bgp ipv6 community

[<type>] [exact-match]

This command displays routes that belong to the specified

communities for BGP4+.

awplus#

show bgp ipv6 community-list

<listname> [exact-match]

This command displays routes that are permitted by the

community list for BGP4+.

awplus#

show ip bgp filter-list

This command displays BGP IPv4 routes that are matched by

the specified autonomous system path access list.

awplus#

show bgp ipv6 filter-list

This command displays BGP4+ IPv6 routes that are matched by

the specified autonomous system path access list.

awplus#

show ip bgp inconsistent-as

This command displays the BGP IPv4 routes with inconsistent

originating autonomous systems.

awplus#

show bgp ipv6 inconsistent-as

This command displays the BGP4+ IPv6 routes with

inconsistent originating autonomous systems.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

1.30

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Introduction

awplus#

show ip bgp regexp <expression>

This command displays the routes that have an autonomous

system path that matches the specified regular expression

entered on the command line.

awplus#

show ip bgp [<ip-addr>|

<ip-addr/m>]

This command displays the contents of the IPv4 routes in the

BGP routing table.

awplus#

show bgp ipv6 <ipv6-addr>

This command displays the contents of the IPv6 routes in the

BGP4+ routing table.

awplus#

show ip bgp neighbors

[<ipv4-addr>

[advertised-routes|

received prefix-filter|

received-routes|routes]]

This command displays detailed information on connections to

individual BGP neighbors. Note this command does not display

IPv4 routes learned from a specified BGP neighbor. It shows

BGP session information and the number of announced and

accepted prefixes. A counter shows how many routes have

been announced and accepted, but not learned.

awplus#

show bgp ipv6 neighbors [<ipv6-

addr> [advertised-routes|

received prefix-filter|

This command displays detailed information on connections to

individual BGP4+ neighbors. Note this command does not

display IPv6 routes learned from a specified BGP4+ neighbor. It

shows BGP4+ session information and the number of

received-routes|routes]]

announced and accepted prefixes. A counter shows how many

routes have been announced and accepted, but not learned.

awplus#

show ip bgp paths

This command displays all BGP paths for IPv4 routes in the

table.

awplus#

show bgp ipv6 paths

This command displays all BGP4+ paths for IPv6 routes in the

table.

awplus#

show ip bgp summary

This command displays the status of all BGP connections.

This command displays the status of all BGP4+ connections.

awplus#

show bgp ipv6 summary

BGP Neighbor status logging

To enable the logging of messages generated when a BGP neighbor resets, use the

following command in Router Configuration mode:

awplus(config-router)#

bgp log-neighbor-changes

This command generates log messages whenever a BGP

neighbor resets.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

1.31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Introduction

BGP Connections Reset

When a link between external neighbors drops, a BGP session does not reset immediately.

To reset a BGP session when an interface goes down, use this command in Router

Configuration mode

awplus(config-router)#

bgp fast-external-failover

This command resets BGP sessions automatically.

BGP Versions

By default, BGP sessions begin using BGP Version 4 and negotiate downward to earlier

versions as needed. To prevent negotiation and force the BGP version used to

communicate with a neighbor, use the command below in Router Configuration mode:

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor <neighborid> version

This command specifies the BGP version to use when

communicating with a neighbor.

BGP Confederations

One way to reduce the iBGP mesh is to divide an autonomous system into multiple sub-

autonomous systems and group them into a single confederation. To the outside world,

the confederation looks like a single autonomous system.

Each autonomous system is fully meshed within itself, and has few connections to other

autonomous systems in the same confederation. Though peers in different autonomous

systems have eBGP sessions, they exchange routing information as iBGP peers.

To configure a BGP confederation, you must specify a confederation identifier. To the

outside world, the group of autonomous systems will look like a single autonomous

system with the confederation identifier as the autonomous system number. To configure

a BGP confederation identifier, use the following command in Router Configuration mode:

awplus(router-config)#

bgp confederation identifier

This command configures a BGP confederation.

<1-4294967295>

In order to treat the neighbors from other autonomous systems within the confederation

as special eBGP peers, use the following command in Router Configuration mode:

awplus(router-config)#

bgp confederation peers

<1-4294967295>

This command specifies the autonomous systems that belong

to the confederation.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

1.32

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Introduction

BGP Route Reflectors

BGP requires that all iBGP speakers be fully meshed. Another way to reduce the iBGP mesh

is to configure a BGP route reflector, instead of configuring a BGP confederation.

With route reflectors, all iBGP speakers need not be fully meshed because there is a

method to pass learned routes to neighbors. In this model, an iBGP peer is configured to

be a route reflector responsible for passing iBGP learned routes to a set of iBGP neighbors.

The internal peers of the route reflector are divided into two groups: client peers and all

the other routers in the autonomous system (non-client peers). A route reflector reflects

routes between these two groups.

The route reflector and its client peers form a cluster. The non-client peers must be fully

meshed with each other, but the client peers need not be fully meshed. The clients in the

cluster do not communicate with iBGP speakers outside their cluster.

When the route reflector receives an advertised route, depending on the neighbor, it takes

the following actions:

■

A route from an external BGP speaker is advertised to all clients and non-client peers.

A route from a non-client peer is advertised to all clients.

A route from a client is advertised to all clients and non-client peers. Hence, the clients

need not be fully meshed.

To configure a route reflector and its clients, use the command below in Router

Configuration mode:

awplus(router-config)#

bgp cluster-id {<ip-address>|

route-reflector-client

This command configures the local router as a BGP route

reflector and the specified neighbor as a client.

Along with route reflector-aware BGP speakers, you can have BGP speakers that do not

understand the concept of route reflectors. They can be members of client or non-client

groups allowing a gradual migration from the old BGP model to the route reflector model.

An autonomous system can have multiple route reflectors. A route reflector treats other

route reflectors just like other iBGP speakers. A route reflector can be configured to have

other route reflectors in a client group or non-client group.

Each route reflector would be configured with other route reflectors as non-client peers,

so the route reflectors will be fully meshed. The clients are configured to maintain iBGP

sessions with only the route reflector in their cluster.

If the cluster has more than one route reflector, configure the cluster ID by using the

following command in Router Configuration mode:

awplus(router-config)#

This command configures the cluster-id if the BGP cluster has

more than one route reflector. A cluster includes one or more

route reflectors and their clients. Usually, each cluster is

identified by the router-id of its single route reflector. .

<cluster-id>}

Use the show ip bgp (BGP) command in Privileged Exec mode to display the originator ID

and the cluster-list attributes.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

1.33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Introduction

BGP Community Filtering

BGP supports transit policies via controlled distribution of routing information. The

distribution of routing information is based on one of the following three values:

■

IP address.

The value of the autonomous system path attribute.

The value of the communities attribute (as described in this section).

The communities attribute is a way to group destinations into communities and apply

routing decisions based on the communities. This method simplifies the configuration of a

BGP speaker that controls distribution of routing information.

A community is a group of destinations that share some common attribute. Each

destination can belong to multiple communities.

The communities attribute is an optional, transitive, global attribute in the numerical

range from 1 to 4,294,967,200. Along with Internet community, there are a few predefined,

well-known communities, as follows:

■

internet—Advertise this route to the Internet community. All routers belong to it.

no-export—Do not advertise this route to eBGP peers.

no-advertise—Do not advertise this route to any peer (internal or external).

local-as—Do not advertise this route to peers outside the local autonomous system.

This route will not be advertised to other autonomous systems or sub-autonomous

systems when confederations are configured.

Based on the community, you can control which routing information to accept, prefer, or

distribute to other neighbors. When routes are aggregated, the resulting aggregate has a

communities attribute that contains all communities from all the initial routes.

You can use community lists to create groups of communities to use in a match clause of a

route map, and a series of community lists can be created. Statements are checked until a

match is found. As soon as one statement is satisfied, the test is concluded.

To create a community list, use the following command in Global Configuration mode:

awplus(config)#

ip community-list <listname>

This command creates a community-list. To set communities

attributes and match clauses based on communities, see the

match community (Route Map) command and the set

community (Route Map) command for further information.

{deny|permit} .<community>

By default, the communities attribute is sent to a neighbor. To specify that the

communities attribute are not sent to the neighbor, use the command below in Router

Configuration mode:

awplus(config-router)#

no neighbor <neighborid>

send-community {both|extended|

standard}

This command specifies that the communities attribute be sent

to the neighbor at this IP address. Both standard and extended

communities can be specified with the both keyword. Only

standard or only extended can be specified with the standard

and extended keywords

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

1.34

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Introduction

BGP Optimization

How to determine Backdoor Routes

You can determine which networks are reachable by using a backdoor route that the

border router should use. A backdoor network is treated as a local network, except that it

is not advertised. To configure backdoor routes, use the network backdoor command,

beginning in Router Configuration mode:

awplus(config-router)#

network {<ip-prefix/length>|

This command determines reachable networks through

backdoor routes when you apply the optional backdoor

parameter.

<ip-network-addr>} [mask

<network-mask>] [route-map

<route-map-name>] [backdoor]

How to set the BGP Administrative Distance

Administrative Distance is a measure of the preference of different routing protocols. BGP

uses three different administrative distances: external, internal, and local. Routes learned

through external BGP are given the external distance, routes learned with iBGP are given

the internal distance, and routes that are part of this autonomous system are given the

local distance. To assign a BGP administrative distance, use the following command in

Router Configuration mode:

awplus(config-router)#

distance bgp <ebgp> <ibgp>

<local>

This command assigns a BGP administrative distance.

Changing administrative distance of BGP routes may cause issues so is not recommended.

The external distance should be lower than any other dynamic routing protocol, and the

internal and local distances should be higher than any other dynamic routing protocol.

How to change BGP default local preference value

You can define a particular path as more preferable or less preferable than other paths by

changing the default local preference value of 100. To assign a different default local

preference value, use the following command in Router Configuration mode:

awplus(config-router)#

bgp default local-preference

This command changes the default local preference value.

You can use route maps to change the default local preference

of specific paths.

<pref-value>

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

1.35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Introduction

How to redistribute the default network 0.0.0.0

By default, you are not allowed to redistribute network 0.0.0.0. To permit the redistribution

of network 0.0.0.0, use the following command in Router Configuration or Address Family

Configuration modes:

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor {<neighborid>}

default-originate [route-map

<routemap-name>]

This command allows the redistribution of the default network

0.0.0.0 into BGP from the Router Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor {<neighborid>}

default-originate [route-map

<routemap-name>]

This command allows the redistribution of the default network

0.0.0.0 into BGP from the Address Family Configuration mode.

How to adjust BGP Timers

BGP uses certain timers to control periodic activities such as the sending of keepalive

messages and the interval after not receiving a keepalive message after which software

declares a peer dead.

By default, the keepalive timer is 60 seconds, and the hold-time timer is 180 seconds.You

can adjust these timers. When a connection is started, BGP will negotiate the hold time

with the neighbor. The smaller of the two hold times will be chosen. The keepalive timer is

then set based on the negotiated hold time and the configured keepalive time.

To adjust BGP timers for all neighbors, use the following command in Router

Configuration mode:

awplus(config-router)#

timers bgp <keepalive>

This command adjusts BGP timers for all neighbors.

To adjust BGP keepalive and hold-time timers for a specific neighbor, use the following

command in Router Configuration mode:

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor <neighborid> timers

{<keepalive> <holdtime>|connect

<connect>}

This command sets the keepalive and hold-time timers (in

seconds) for the specified peer or peer group. To clear the

timers for a BGP neighbor or peer group, use the negated form

of the neighbor timers command.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

1.36

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Introduction

How to adjust the eBGP advertisement interval

AS200

AS300

eBGP 30 second

interval

2001:db8::80:1

2001:db8::80:2

Router 1

Router 2

Router ID 10.10.10.11

Router ID 10.10.10.12

intro_bgp4+_3.eps

When a route advertised by BGP changes, BGP sends an Update message. If an advertised

route is flapping, and becomes unavailable. Route flapping is often caused when an

interface is unstable, and a flood of Update messages will occur. One approach to control

the flooding of BGP messages is to configure the advertisement interval. With the default

interval value of 30 seconds for eBGP neighbors, BGP routing updates are sent only every

30 seconds, even if a route is flapping many times during this 30 second interval.

To assign a different advertisement-interval value for eBGP peers, use the following

command in Router Configuration mode::

awplus(config-router)#

advertisement-interval <time>

This command sets the minimum interval between sending

eBGP routing updates with a 30 second eBGP default interval.

Use this command instead of the neighbor as-origination-interval (BGP and BGP4+)

command for eBGP peers with prefixes not in the same AS for updates not in a local AS.

How to adjust the iBGP advertisement interval

AS200

iBGP 5 second

fe80::1

vlan1

vlan2

interval

fe80::2

Router 1

Router 2

Router ID 10.10.10.11

Router ID 10.10.10.12

intro_bgp4+_2

With the default value of 5 seconds for iBGP neighbors, BGP routing updates are sent only

every 5 seconds, even if a route is flapping many times during this 5 second interval.

To assign a different advertisement-interval value for iBGP peers, use the following

command in Router Configuration mode: :

awplus(config-router)#

advertisement-interval <time>

This command sets the minimum interval between sending

eBGP routing updates with a 5 second iBGP default interval.

BGP dampening can also be used to control the effects of flapping routes. See the BGP

and BGP4+ Route Dampening section in this chapter, and the bgp dampening (BGP

and BGP4+) command in the BGP and BGP4+ Commands chapter for more information.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

1.37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Introduction

How to adjust the AS origination interval

AS1000

Peer 1

10.10.9.1

iBGP 15 second

interval with

prefixes in

Peer 2

the same AS

10.10.7.3

Peer 3

intro_bgp_5

With the default value of 15 seconds for iBGP neighbors with a prefix in the same AS, BGP

routing updates are sent only every 15 seconds, even if a route is flapping many times

during this 15 second interval.

To assign a different as-origination-interval value for iBGP peers with a prefix in the same

AS, use the following command in Router Configuration mode: :

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor <neighbor_address>

as-origination-interval <time>

This command sets the minimum interval between sending

iBGP routing updates with a 15 second iBGP default interval to

report changes in the local AS for iBGP peers with prefixes in

the same local AS.

Use this command instead of the neighbor advertisement-interval (BGP and BGP4+)

command for iBGP peers with prefixes in the same AS for updates only within a local AS.

BGP dampening can also be used to control the effects of flapping routes. See the BGP

and BGP4+ Route Dampening section in this chapter, and the bgp dampening (BGP

and BGP4+) command in the BGP and BGP4+ Commands chapter for more information.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

1.38

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Introduction

How to remove private AS numbers for BGP

There are public and private AS numbers, in the same way there are public and private IP

addresses. Like the private IP addresses that you cannot send to the Internet, you cannot

send private AS numbers to the Internet. This functionality enables you to remove them.

Public AS numbers range from 1 to 64,511. Private AS numbers range for 64,512 and

65,535. Private AS numbers are used to divide large ASs into smaller multiple ASs for eBGP.

ISPs may assign private AS numbers to save public AS number usage. When you receive

private AS numbers, you need to remove them before you send updates to the Internet. To

remove private AS numbers for BGP, use this command in the Router Configuration mode:

awplus(config-router)#

How to remove BGP filtering for private AS numbers

remove-private-AS

This command removes private AS numbers for BGP in Router

Configuration mode. This command is not supported for

BGP4+ in IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode.

This command removes a private AS number and makes an

update packet with a public AS number as the AS path

attribute. So only public AS numbers are entered in Internet

BGP routing tables, and private AS numbers are not entered in

Internet BGP tables.

For the filtering to apply, both peering devices must be set to use either 2-byte or

extended 4- byte ASN (with the same ASN type set on both peers). For example, if a device

(which defaults to use a 4-byte ASN), is peered with a device that defaults to a 2-byte ASN,

then the device using a 2-byte ASN device also needs to be configured with the command

bgp extended-asn-cap for the filtering to apply.

The neighbor remove-private-AS (BGP) command is not available in IPv6 Address

Family Configuration mode for BGP4+. This command is only available in Router

Configuration mode for BGP.

Verify the application of this command with the show running-config and show ip bgp

commands. See sample verification output in the following sections:

■

How to apply BGP filtering for private AS numbers.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

1.39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Introduction

How to remove BGP filtering for private AS numbers

Remove BGP filtering for private AS numbers using the no neighbor <neighborid>

remove-private-A Scommand. See this example from Router Configuration mode:

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 5

no neighbor 192.168.0.2 remove-private-AS

awplus(config-router)#

If the AS path attribute command is removed from the Router 2 BGP configuration, then

the private AS is correctly not filtered. See the sample console command entries below:

Router 2#configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Router 2(config)#router bgp 5

Router 2(config-router)#no neighbor 192.168.0.2 remove-private-AS

Router 2(config-router)#exit

Router 2(config)#exit

Router 2#clear ip bgp *

The show ip bgp command output below on Router 1 shows an update for the network

10.0.0.0/24 received from Router 2 (192.68.0.1) has an AS path attribute 5, which is the AS

number of Router 2, and contains private AS path 65000.

Router 1#show running-config router bgp

router bgp 1

neighbor 192.168.0.1 remote-as 5

Router 1#show ip bgp

BGP table version is 1017, local router ID is 192.168.0.2

Status codes: s suppressed, d damped, h history, * valid, > best, i - internal

l - labeled, S Stale

Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete

Network

Next Hop

Metric LocPrf Weight Path

*> 10.0.0.0/24

*> 172.30.0.0

*> 192.168.0.0

192.168.0.1

0 5 65000 i

0 5 i

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

1.40

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Introduction

How to apply BGP filtering for private AS numbers

Apply BGP filtering for private AS numbers using the neighbor <neighborid>

remove-private-A Scommand. See this example from Router Configuration mode:

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 5

neighbor 192.168.0.2 remove-private-AS

awplus(config-router)#

If the non-default AS path attribute command is applied to the Router 2 BGP configuration

then the private AS is correctly filtered. See the sample console command entries below:

Router 2#configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Router 2(config)#router bgp 5

Router 2(config-router)#neighbor 192.168.0.2 remove-private-AS

Router 2(config-router)#exit

Router 2(config)#exit

Router 2#clear ip bgp *

The show ip bgp command output on ISP Router 1 shows that the update for the network

10.0.0.0/24 received from Router 2 (192.68.0.1) has an AS path attribute 5. This is the AS

number of Router 2, without private AS path 65000.

In the ISP router BGP prefix table below, the only AS path attribute for the 10.0.0.0/24

network is '5', and the AS 65000 has been correctly filtered out from the update sent by

Router 2 received into ISP Router 1. This is displayed in the show ip bgp output below:

Router 1#show running-config router bgp

router bgp 1

neighbor 192.168.0.1 remote-as 5

neighbor 192.168.0.2 remove-private-as

Router 1#show ip bgp

BGP table version is 1041, local router ID is 192.168.0.2

Status codes: s suppressed, d damped, h history, * valid, > best, i - internal

l - labeled, S Stale

Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete

Network

Next Hop

Metric LocPrf Weight Path

*> 10.0.0.0/24

*> 172.30.0.0

*> 192.168.0.0

192.168.0.1

0 5 i

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

1.41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Introduction

BGP and BGP4+ Terminology

See the below table for descriptions of BGP and BGP4+ terms used through this chapter:

Term

Description

AS number (ASN)

A number that identifies an Autonomous System. Previously, an

ASN was a 16-bit number between 1 and 64,511 (public) and

64,512 and 65,535 (private) assigned to an AS for the purpose of

BGP operation. Since RFC 6793, an ASN is now 32-bit with a

range of decimal values between 1 and 4,294,967,295 .

AS_Path

A BGP path attribute that lists ASNs through which the route has

been advertised.

AS_Sequence

auto summary

A type of AS_Path segment consisting of an ordered list of ASNs

through which the route has been advertised.

A routing protocol feature in which a router that connects to

more than one classful network advertises summarized routes

for each entire classful network when sending updates out

interfaces connected to other classful networks.

Autonomous System

(AS)

A set of routers inside a single administrative authority, grouped

together for the purpose of controlling routing policies for the

routes advertised by that group to the Internet.

BGP best path

algorithm

The process that BGP uses to examine competing BGP paths

(routes) in its BGP table, for a single prefix, choosing one route

as the best route. The best path algorithm results in a choice of a

single route for each prefix as that router’s best BGP path. BGP

compares the current best path against the next path in the list.

BGP peer

A BGP neighbor. A BGP neighbor is a router running BGP that

formed a BGP neighbor relationship to exchange BGP Updates.

BGP peer group

A configuration construct in which multiple neighbors’

parameters can be configured as a group to reduce the length

of the configuration. BGP performs routing policy logic against

one set of Updates for the peer group, improving convergence

time and reducing the CPU load.

BGP synchronization

A feature in which BGP routes cannot be considered to be a best

route to reach a prefix unless that same prefix exists in the

router’s IP routing table as learned via some IGP. When

synchronization is enabled, BGP does not advertise a route

learned via an iBGP peer to external peers, until the route is

learned locally, or via an IGP and is present in the routing table.

When synchronization is disabled, BGP can use and advertise

routes from an iBGP peer to external peers, which are not

present in the routing table.

BGP table

A table inside a router that holds the path attributes known by

BGP on that router.

Border Gateway

Protocol (BGP)

An exterior routing protocol designed to exchange prefix

information between different autonomous systems. The

information includes characteristics called path attributes,

which allow for great flexibility regarding routing choices.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

1.42

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Introduction

Term

Description

CIDR

Classless Inter-Domain Routing. A routing method supported by

BGP that is based on route aggregation. CIDR allows router to

group routes together to cut down on the amount of routing

information carried by routers. Several IP networks appear as a

single network to networks outside of those grouped together.

External BGP (eBGP)

Refers to how a router views a BGP peer relationship, where the

peer is in another AS (Autonomous System). See also Internal

BGP (iBGP), where the peer is in the same AS.

Interior Gateway

Protocol (IGP)

A routing protocol designed to be used to exchange routing

information inside a single autonomous system.

Internal BGP (iBGP)

neighbor

A characteristic of a BGP neighbor relationship, specifically

when the two routers are internal to the same BGP ASN.

Another router with which a router decides to exchange routing

information.

Neighbor Type

Either external BGP (eBGP), confederation eBGP, or internal BGP

(iBGP). The term refers to a peer connection and whether the

peers are in different ASs (eBGP), different confederation

systems (confederation eBGP), or in the same AS (iBGP).

Next Hop field

With a routing update, or routing table entry, the portion of a

route that defines the next router to which a packet should be

sent to reach the destination subnet. With routing protocols, the

Next Hop field may define a router other than the router

sending the routing update.

Next-hop self

path control

A BGP configuration setting that tells the local router to change

the NEXT_HOP path attribute to refer to its own BGP Update

Source when advertising routes to BGP neighbors.

A general term, that refers to any function that impacts how

routers forward packets. These functions include routing

protocols and any other feature that impacts the IP routing

table, plus any feature that impacts the packet forwarding

process.

private AS

BGP ASN whose value is between 64,512 and 65,535. These

values are not assigned for use on the Internet and can be used

for private purposes, typically either within confederations or by

ISPs to hide the ASN used by some customers.

A private ASN

public ASN

An Autonomous System Number (ASN) that falls inside the

Private AS range.

An ASN that fits below the private ASN range, specifically from 1

through 54,511 with a 16-bit ASN. With a 32-bit ASN the range is

1 through 4,294,967,295.

redistribution

The process on a router of taking the routes from the IP routing

table, as learned by one routing protocol, and injecting routes

for those same subnets into another routing protocol.

regular expression

A list of interspersed alphanumeric literals and metacharacters

used to apply complex matching logic to alphanumeric strings.

Often used for matching AS_Paths.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

1.43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Introduction

Term

Description

route map

Enables logic to be applied to a set of items. Often used for

decisions about what routes to redistribute and for setting

characteristics of those routes, for instance, metric values.

route redistribution

The process of taking routes known through one routing

protocol and advertising those routes with another routing

protocol.

route summarization

summary route

A consolidation of advertised addresses that causes a single

summary route to be advertised.

A route that is created to represent one or more smaller

component routes, typically to reduce the size of routing and

topology tables.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

1.44

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2: BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................2.2

BGP Configurations ..................................................................................................................................2.3

Enabling BGP Peers In The Same Autonomous System ......................................................2.3

Enabling BGP Between Different Autonomous Systems ....................................................2.5

Configuring a BGP Route Reflector .............................................................................................2.6

Configuring a BGP Confederation ...............................................................................................2.8

Configuring BGP Authentication .............................................................................................. 2.11

Configuring BGP Graceful Reset................................................................................................ 2.13

Configuring BGP Distance ........................................................................................................... 2.15

Configuring BGP Graceful Restart............................................................................................. 2.18

Configuring BGP Weight per Peer ............................................................................................ 2.20

BGP4+ Configurations.......................................................................................................................... 2.23

Enabling iBGP Peering using a Global Address.................................................................... 2.23

Enabling iBGP Peering using a Link-local Address ............................................................. 2.26

Enabling eBGP Peering between different Autonomous Systems............................... 2.29

Configuring Route-Maps with BGP4 +..................................................................................... 2.31

Configuring BGP4+ Graceful Restart ....................................................................................... 2.35

Configuring BGP4+ Distance...................................................................................................... 2.39

Configuring BGP4+ Graceful Reset........................................................................................... 2.43

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

2.1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

Introduction

This chapter contains basic BGP and BGP4+ configuration examples.

For details about the commands used in these examples, or the outputs from validation

commands, see Chapter 3, BGP and BGP4+ Commands . This chapter provides an

alphabetical reference of commands used to configure the Border Gateway Protocol

for IPv4 (BGP) and for IPv6 (BGP4+).

For basic BGP and BGP4+ introduction information, including terminology and concepts

about BGP and BGP4+, including the concept of autonomous system numbers (ASN), path

attributes (PA), and both internal and external BGP/BGP4+, see Chapter 1, BGP and

BGP4+ Introduction.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

2.2

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

BGP Configurations

Enabling BGP Peers In The Same Autonomous

System

This example shows the minimum configuration required for enabling BGP on an

interface. Peer 1 and Peer 2 are two BGP Peers belonging to the same Autonomous

System (AS), AS200, connecting to network 10.10.10.0/24. First, define the routing process

and the AS number to which the peers belong. Then, define BGP neighbors to start

exchanging routing updates.

10.10.10.10

10.10.10.11

Peer 1

Peer 2

bgp_1

Peer 1

awplus#

configure terminal

Enter the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config)#

router bgp 200

Define the BGP routing process. The number 200 specifies

the AS number of Peer 1.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 10.10.10.11 remote-as 200

Define BGP neighbors. 10.10.10.11 is the IP address of the

neighbor (Peer 2) and 200 is the neighbor’s AS number.

Peer 2

awplus#

configure terminal

Enter the Global Configuration mode

awplus(config)#

router bgp 200

Define the BGP routing process. The number 200 specifies

the AS number of Peer 2.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 10.10.10.10 remote-as 200

Define BGP neighbors. 10.10.10.10 is the IP address of the

neighbor (Peer 1) and 200 is the neighbor’s AS number.

Names of Commands Used

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

2.3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

Validation Commands

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

2.4

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

Enabling BGP Between Different Autonomous

Systems

This example shows the minimum configuration required for enabling BGP on an

interface when the BGP peers belong to different Autonomous Systems (ASs). Peer 1 and

Peer 2 are two BGP peers in different ASs, AS200 and AS300 connecting to network

10.10.10.0/24.

AS200

AS300

10.10.10.10

10.10.10.11

Peer 1

Peer 2

bgp_2

Peer 1

awplus#

configure terminal

Enter the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config)#

router bgp 200

Define the BGP routing process. The number 200

specifies the AS number of Peer 1.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 10.10.10.11 remote-as 300

Define BGP neighbors. 10.10.10.11 is the IP address of the

neighbor (Peer 2) and 300 is the neighbor’s AS number.

Peer 2

awplus#

configure terminal

Enter the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config)#

router bgp 300

Define the BGP routing process. The number 300

specifies the AS number of Peer 2.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 10.10.10.10 remote-as 200

Define BGP neighbors. 10.10.10.10 is the IP address of the

neighbor (Peer 1) and 200 is the neighbor’s AS number.

Names of Commands Used

Validation Commands

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

2.5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

Configuring a BGP Route Reflector

Use a BGP Route Reflector to reduce the iBGP mesh inside an AS. In this example, Peer 2,

Peer 5 and Peer 4 would have to maintain a full mesh among themselves but by making

Peer 5 the Route Reflector, Peer 2 (Client1) has an iBGP session with the Route Reflector

only and not with Peer 4 (Client 2).

The routes learned from Peer 2 are advertised to the other clients and to iBGP peers

outside the cluster; the iBGP routes learned from iBGP peers outside the cluster are

advertised to Peer 2. This reduces the iBGP peer connections in AS1.

AS1

Peer 4

Peer 1

RR Client 2

10.10.11.50

Peer 6

10.10.11.10

Peer 2

10.10.10.50

10.10.10.10

RR Client 1

Peer 5

Route Reflector

Peer 3

bgp_4

Route Reflector (Peer 5)

awplus#

configure terminal

Enter the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config)#

router bgp 1

Define the BGP routing process. The number 1specifies

the AS number of Peer 5.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 10.10.10.50 remote-as 1

Define BGP neighbors. 10.10.10.50is the IP address

of one of the neighbors (Peer 2) and 1is the neighbor’s

AS number.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 10.10.10.50 route-reflector

client

Configure Peer 5 as the Route-Reflector (RR) and

neighbor Peer 2 as its client.

awplus(config-router)#

Define BGP neighbor. 10.10.11.50is the IP address of

one of the neighbors (Peer 4) and 1 is the neighbor’s AS

number.

neighbor 10.10.11.50 remote-as 1

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

2.6

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 10.10.11.50 route-reflector

client

Configure Peer 5 as the Route-Reflector (RR) and

neighbor Peer 4 as its client.

Route Reflector Client 1 (Peer 2)

awplus(config)#

router bgp 1

Define the BGP routing process. The number 1specifies

the AS number of Peer 2.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 10.10.10.10 remote-as 1

Define BGP neighbors. 10.10.10.10is the IP address

of the neighbor (Peer 5) and 1is the neighbor’s AS

number.

Route Reflector Client 2 (Peer 4)

awplus(config)#

router bgp 1

Define the BGP routing process. The number 1specifies

the AS number of Peer 4.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 10.10.11.10 remote-as 1

Define BGP neighbors. 10.10.11.10is the IP address

of the neighbor (Peer 5) and 1 is the neighbor’s AS

number.

Names of Commands Used

neighbor route-reflector-client (BGP)

Validation Commands

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

2.7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

Configuring a BGP Confederation

In this example, AS1 contains three Confederation Autonomous Systems - AS 1000, AS

1001 and AS 1002. To any outside AS, the Confederation is a single AS. AS1 Confederation

eBGP is run between Peer 2 and Peer 5, and between Peer 5 and Peer 7. Peer 2 is

configured so that its local AS is 1000. Its peer connection to Peer 5 is set up like any other

eBGP session.

The bgp confederation identifier (BGP and BGP4+) command on page 3.21 tells the

peer that it is a member of a Confederation and the Confederation ID. The bgp

confederation peers (BGP and BGP4+) command on page 3.22 lists the member AS to

which Peer 2 is connected. The command tells the BGP process that the eBGP connection

is a Confederation eBGP rather than a normal eBGP.

AS1

Peer 7

Peer 8

10.10.15.8

AS1000

Peer 1

10.10.11.7

AS1002

10.10.9.1

eBGP

10.10.11.5

eBGP

10.10.10.2

10.10.10.5

Peer 2

Peer 5

10.10.12.4

10.10.13.6

AS1001

10.10.7.3

Peer 3

Peer 4

Peer 6

bgp_5

Peer 2

awplus#

configure terminal

Enter the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config)#

router bgp 1000

Define the BGP routing process. The number 1000specifies

the AS number of Peer 2.

awplus(config-router)#

bgp confederation identifier 1

Specify a BGP Confederation Identifier. To routers outside

the confederation, the whole confederation will appear as a

single AS, and the identifier will appear as its AS number.

awplus(config-router)#

bgp confederation peers 1001 1002

Specify 1001(AS1001) and 1002(AS1002) to become

members of the Confederation.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

2.8

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

Peer 2 (cont’d)

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 10.10.10.5 remote-as 1001

awplus(config-router)#

Define BGP neighbors for Peer 2 by specifying the IP

addresses and the AS numbers of neighbors.

neighbor 10.10.9.1 remote-as 1000

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 10.10.7.3 remote-as 1000

Peer 5

awplus(config)#

router bgp 1001

Define the BGP routing process. The number 1001specifies

the AS number of Peer 5.

awplus(config-router)#

bgp confederation identifier 1

Specify a BGP Confederation Identifier. To routers outside

the confederation, the whole confederation will appear as a

single AS, and the identifier will appear as its AS number.

awplus(config-router)#

bgp confederation peers 1000 1002

Specify 1000(AS1000) and 1002(AS1002) to become

members of the Confederation.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 10.10.10.2 remote-as 1000

awplus(config-router)#

Define BGP neighbors for Peer 5 by specifying the IP

addresses and the AS numbers of neighbors.

neighbor 10.10.11.7 remote-as 1002

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 10.10.13.6 remote-as 1001

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 10.10.12.4 remote-as 1001

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

2.9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

Peer 7

awplus(config)#

router bgp 1002

Define the BGP routing process. The number 1001

specifies the AS number of Peer 5.

awplus(config-router)#

bgp confederation identifier 1

Specify a BGP Confederation Identifier. To routers outside

the confederation, the whole confederation will appear as

a single AS, and the identifier will appear as its AS

number.

awplus(config-router)#

bgp confederation peers 1000 1001

Specify 1000(AS1000) and 1001(AS1001) to become

members of the Confederation.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 10.10.11.5 remote-as 1001

awplus(config-router)#

Define BGP neighbors for Peer 7 by specifying the IP

addresses and the AS numbers of neighbors.

neighbor 10.10.15.8 remote-as 1002

Names of Commands Used

bgp confederation peers (BGP and BGP4+)

bgp confederation identifier (BGP and BGP4+)

Validation Commands

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

2.10

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

Configuring BGP Authentication

BGP authentication allows users to receive selected routing information, enhancing

security of their network traffic. When BGP authentication is enabled on a peer, the peer

verifies routing packet it receives by exchanging a password that is configured on both

the sending and the receiving peers.

In this example, both Peer 1 and Peer 2 have manageras the password.

Configure the same password on all routers that are to communicate using BGP in a

network.

AS200 AS300

10.10.10.10

10.10.10.11

Peer 1

Peer 2

bgp_6

Peer 1

awplus(config)#

configure terminal

Enter the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

router bgp 200

Define the BGP routing process. The number 200

specifies the AS number of Peer 1.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 10.10.10.11 remote-as 200

Define BGP neighbors and establish a TCP session.

10.10.10.11is the IP address of the neighbor (Peer 2)

and 200is the neighbor’s AS number.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 10.10.10.11 password 1

manager

Specify the encryption type and the password.

Peer 2

awplus(config)#

configure terminal

Enter the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

router bgp 200

Define the BGP routing process.

The number 200specifies the AS number of Peer 2.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 10.10.10.10 remote-as 200

Define BGP neighbors and establish a TCP session.

10.10.10.10is the IP address of the neighbor (Peer 1)

and 200is the neighbor’s AS number.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 10.10.10.10 password 1

manager

Specify the encryption type and the password.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

2.11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

Names of Commands Used

neighbor password (BGP and BGP4+)

Validation Commands

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

2.12

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

Configuring BGP Graceful Reset

The graceful restart feature for BGP session reset is used so that any changes in network

configuration do not affect packet forwarding. The bgp graceful-restart graceful-reset

(BGP and BGP4+) command on page 3.33 invokes graceful restart only when a

configuration change forces a peer reset.

This example shows configuring BGP graceful reset.

AS100

AS200

1.1.1.1

1.1.1.2

Peer 1

Peer 2

bgp_7

Peer 1

awplus(config)#

configure terminal

Enter the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

router bgp 100

Define the BGP routing process. The number 100

specifies the AS number of Peer 1.

awplus(config-router)#

bgp graceful-restart

Enable BGP graceful restart support.

awplus(config-router)#

bgp graceful-restart graceful-reset

Configure to invoke graceful restart when a configuration

change forces a peer reset.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 1.1.1.2 remote-as 200

Specify the neighbor’s IP address (1.1.1.2) and the AS

number of the neighbor (200).

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 1.1.1.2 capability

graceful-restart

Specify the neighbor’s IP address (1.1.1.2) for which the

graceful restart capability is supported.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

2.13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

Peer 2

awplus(config)#

configure terminal

Enter the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

router bgp 200

Define the BGP routing process.

The number 200specifies the AS number of Peer 2.

awplus(config-router)#

bgp graceful-restart

Enable BGP graceful restart support.

awplus(config-router)#

bgp graceful-restart graceful-reset

Configure to invoke graceful restart when a configuration

change forces a peer reset.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 1.1.1.1 remote-as 100

Specify the neighbor’s IP address (1.1.1.1) and the AS

number of the neighbor (100).

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 1.1.1.1 capability

graceful-restart

Specify the neighbor’s IP address (1.1.1.1) for which the

graceful restart capability is supported

Names of Commands Used

bgp graceful-restart graceful-reset (BGP and BGP4+)

neighbor capability graceful-restart (BGP and BGP4+)

neighbor restart-time (BGP and BGP4+)

Validation Commands

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

2.14

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

Configuring BGP Distance

You can configure administrative distance in BGP for a specific address family.

This example shows configuring the BGP distance for the IPv4 Address Family.

AS100

AS200

10.10.10.10

10.10.10.20

10.10.10.30

10.10.10.40

Router 1

Router 2

Router 3

172.16.10.10/24

192.168.10.20/24

bgp_distance

Router 1

awplus(config)#

configure terminal

Enter the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

router bgp 100

Define the BGP routing process. The number 100

specifies the AS number of Router 1.

awplus(config-router)#

network 172.16.10.10/24

Specify the network 172.16.10.10/24to be

advertised by the BGP routing process from Router 1 to

Router 2.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 10.10.10.20 remote-as 100

Specify the neighbor’s IPv4 address (10.10.10.20) and

Autonomous System (AS) number (100). Router 2 is the

neighbor of Router 1.

awplus(config-router)#

address-family ipv4 unicast

Enter the IPv4 Address Family Configuration mode from

the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 10.10.10.20 activate

Activate the exchange of information to the peer

(neighbor) with the IPv4 address 10.10.10.20for

Router 2. Note that other information apart from prefixes

is sent in updates. This command activates the exchange

of information for the peer defined.

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit-address-family

Exit IPv4 Address Family Configuration mode, and return

to the Router Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

exit

Exit the Router Configuration mode, and return to the

Global Configuration mode.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

2.15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

Router 2

awplus(config)#

configure terminal

Enter the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

router bgp 100

Define the BGP routing process. The number 100

specifies the AS number of Router 2.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 10.10.10.40 remote-as 200

Specify the neighbor’s IPv4 address (10.10.10.40) and

Autonomous System (AS) number (200). Router 3 is a

neighbor of Router 2.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 10.10.10.10 remote-as 100

Specify the neighbor’s IPv4 address (10.10.10.10)

(and Autonomous System (AS) number (100). Router 1 is

a neighbor of Router 2.

awplus(config-router)#

address-family ipv4 unicast

Enter the IPv4 Address Family Configuration mode from

the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router-af)#

aggregate-address 172.31.10.10/24

summary-only

Configure an IPv4 non-AS-set aggregate route on Router

2. Note that the local distance gets applied to this route.

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 10.10.10.10 activate

Activate the exchange of information to the peer

(neighbor) with the IPv4 address 10.10.10.10(Router

1). Note that other information apart from prefixes is sent

in updates. This command activates the exchange of

information for the peer defined.

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 10.10.10.40 activate

Activate the exchange of information to the peer

(neighbor) with the IPv4 address 10.10.10.40(Router

3). Note that other information apart from prefixes is sent

in updates. This command activates the exchange of

information for the peer defined.

awplus(config-router-af)#

distance 12 13 11

Configure the administrative distance for external,

internal, and local routes received in IPv6 Address Family

Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit-address-family

Exit IPv4 Address Family Configuration mode, and return

to the Router Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

exit

Exit the Router Configuration mode, and return to the

Global Configuration mode.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

2.16

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

Router 3

awplus(config)#

configure terminal

Enter the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

router bgp 200

Define the BGP routing process. The number 200

specifies the AS number of Router 3.

awplus(config-router)#

network 192.168.10.20/24

Specify the network 192.168.10.20/24to be

advertised by the BGP4+ routing process from Router 3

to Router 2.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 10.10.10.30 remote-as 100

Specify the neighbor’s IPv4 address (10.10.10.30)

(and Autonomous System (AS) number (100). Router 2 is

a neighbor of Router 3.

awplus(config-router)#

address-family ipv4 unicast

Enter the IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode from

the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 10.10.10.30 activate

Activate the exchange of information to the peer

(neighbor) with the IPv4 address 10.10.10.30for

Router 2. Note that other information apart from prefixes

is sent in updates. This command activates the exchange

of information for the peer defined.

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit-address-family

Exit IPv4 Address Family Configuration mode, and return

to the Router Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

exit

Exit the Router Configuration mode, and return to the

Global Configuration mode.

Names of Commands Used

aggregate-address (BGP and BGP4+)

network (BGP and BGP4+)

Validation Commands (re-link to BGP commands)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

2.17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

Configuring BGP Graceful Restart

Using BGP graceful restart, the data forwarding plane of the device can continue to

process and forward packets even if the control plane, which is responsible for

determining best paths, fails. The bgp graceful-restart (BGP and BGP4+) command on

page 3.32 sets the maximum time that a graceful-restart neighbor waits to come back up

after a restart. This value is applied to all neighbors unless you explicitly override it by

configuring the corresponding value on the neighbor.

This example shows configuring BGP graceful restart.

AS100

AS200

1.1.1.1

1.1.1.2

Peer 1

Peer 2

bgp_7

Peer 1

awplus(config)#

configure terminal

Enter the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

router bgp 100

Define the BGP routing process. The number 100

specifies the AS number of Peer 1.

awplus(config-router)#

bgp graceful-restart restart-time

180

Configure the maximum time in seconds (180) required

for neighbor(s) to restart.

awplus(config-router)#

bgp graceful-restart stalepath-time

150

Configure the maximum time in seconds (150) to retain

stale paths from the restarting neighbor(s).

awplus(config-router)#

bgp update-delay 120

Configure the maximum time in seconds (120) to defer

initial route selection.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 1.1.1.2 remote-as 200

Specify the neighbor’s IP address (1.1.1.2) and the AS

number of the neighbor (200).

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 1.1.1.2 capability

graceful-restart

Specify the neighbor’s IP address (1.1.1.2) for which the

graceful restart capability is supported.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

2.18

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

Peer 2

awplus(config)#

configure terminal

Enter the Global Configuration mode.

Define the routing process.

awplus(config-router)#

router bgp 200

The number 200specifies the AS number of Peer 2.

awplus(config-router)#

bgp graceful-restart

Enable BGP graceful restart support. If the restart and

stale-path timers are not configured, the defaults are 90

seconds and 360 seconds, respectively.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 1.1.1.1 remote-as 100

Specify the neighbor’s IP address (1.1.1.1) and the AS

number of the neighbor (100).

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 1.1.1.1 capability

graceful-restart

Specify the neighbor’s IP address (1.1.1.1) for which the

graceful restart capability is supported

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 1.1.1.1 restart-time 160

Configure the maximum time in seconds (160) required

for the neighbor to restart. This overwrites the configured

restart time for that neighbor. For example: the above

configured restart-time for all neighbors is 90 seconds

(the default). With this command, the neighbor, 1.1.1.1,

will have a 160 second restart-time.

Names of Commands Used

bgp graceful-restart graceful-reset (BGP and BGP4+)

bgp update-delay (BGP and BGP4+)

neighbor capability graceful-restart (BGP and BGP4+)

neighbor restart-time (BGP and BGP4+)

Validation Commands

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

2.19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

Configuring BGP Weight per Peer

You can assign a different weight per address family of a peer. For example, a network can

be configured to prefer IPv6 routes from one peer and IPv4 routes from another peer.

If the neighbor weight command is given under a specific address family mode, then the

peer weight is set for that specific address family. If the address family is not specifically set

first, then the weight is updated for the default address family instead.

This example shows configuring the BGP Weight per Peer both for IPv4 Address Family

and for IPv6 Address Family. Router 1 (AS100) uses IPv4 Address Family, Router 2 (AS200)

uses both IPv4 and IPv6 Address Family, Router 3 (AS300) uses IPv6 Address Family.

AS100

AS200

AS300

10.10.10.10

10.10.10.20

2001:db8::115

2001:db8::116

Router 1

Router 2

Router 3

bgp_weight

Router 11

awplus(config)#

configure terminal

Enter the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

router bgp 100

Define the BGP routing process. The number 100

specifies the AS number of Router 1.

awplus(config-router)#

address-family ipv4 unicast

Enter the IPv4 Address Family Configuration mode from

the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 10.10.10.20 remote-as 200

Specify the neighbor’s IPv4 address (10.10.10.20) and

Autonomous System (AS) number (200). Router 2 is the

neighbor of Router 1.

awplus(config-router-af)#

Activate the exchange of information to the peer

(neighbor) with the IPv4 address 10.10.10.20for

Router 2 in IPv4 Address Family Configuration mode.

Note that other information apart from prefixes is sent in

updates. This command activates the exchange of

information for the peer defined.

neighbor 10.10.10.20 activate

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit-address-family

Exit IPv4 Address Family Configuration mode, and return

to the Router Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

exit

Exit the Router Configuration mode, and return to the

Global Configuration mode.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

2.20

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

Router 21

awplus(config)#

configure terminal

Enter the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

router bgp 200

Define the BGP routing process. The number 200

specifies the AS number of Router 2.

awplus(config-router)#

address-family ipv4 unicast

Enter the IPv4 Address Family Configuration mode from

the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 10.10.10.10 remote-as 100

Specify the neighbor’s IPv4 address (10.10.10.10) and

Autonomous System (AS) number (100). Router 1 is a

neighbor of Router 2.

awplus(config-router-af)#

Activate the exchange of information to the peer

(neighbor) with the IPv4 address 10.10.10.10(Router

1) in IPv4 Address Family Configuration mode.

neighbor 10.10.10.10 activate

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 10.10.10.10 weight 500

Add a weight of 500to all IPv4 routes coming from the

neighbor with IPv4 address 10.10.10.10(Router 1).

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit-address-family

Exit IPv4 Address Family Configuration mode, and return

to the Router Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

address-family ipv6 unicast

Enter the IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode from

the Router Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 2001:db8::116 remote-as

300

Specify the neighbor’s IPv4 address (2001:db8::116)

(and Autonomous System (AS) number (300). Router 3 is

a neighbor of Router 2.

awplus(config-router-af)#

Activate the exchange of information to the peer

(neighbor) with the IPv6 address 2001:db8::116

(Router 3) in IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode.

Note that other information apart from prefixes is sent in

updates. This command activates the exchange of

information for the peer defined.

neighbor 2001:db8::116 activate

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 2001:db8::116 weight 700

Add a weight of 500to all IPv6 routes coming from the

neighbor with IPv6 address 2001:db8::116(Router 3).

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit-address-family

Exit IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode, and return

to the Router Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

exit

Exit the Router Configuration mode, and return to the

Global Configuration mode.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

2.21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

Router 31

awplus(config)#

configure terminal

Enter the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

router bgp 300

Define the BGP routing process. The number 300

specifies the AS number of Router 3.

awplus(config-router)#

address-family ipv4 unicast

Enter the IPv4 Address Family Configuration mode from

the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 2001:db8::115 remote-as

200

Specify the neighbor’s IPv6 address (2001:db8::115)

and Autonomous System (AS) number (200). Router 2 is

the neighbor of Router 1.

awplus(config-router-af)#

Activate the exchange of information to the peer

(neighbor) with the IPv6 address 2001:db8::115for

Router 2 in IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode.

Note that other information apart from prefixes is sent in

updates. This command activates the exchange of

information for the peer defined.

neighbor 2001:db8::115 activate

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit-address-family

Exit IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode, and return

to the Router Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

exit

Exit the Router Configuration mode, and return to the

Global Configuration mode.

Names of Commands Used

neighbor weight (BGP and BGP4+)

Validation Commands

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

2.22

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

BGP4+ Configurations

Enabling iBGP Peering using a Global Address

This example shows the minimum configuration required for enabling iBGP on a VLAN

interface. Router 1 and Router 2 are BGP4+ Peers in in the same Autonomous System

(AS), 200, connected to network 2001:db8::/48. First, specify an IPv6 global address,

then define the AS number for the routers. Next, configure a Router ID, then define BGP4+

neighbors to start exchanging routing updates.

AS200

2001:db8::10/48

vlan1

2001:db8::11/48

vlan1

Router 1

Router 2

Router ID 10.10.10.1

Router ID 10.10.10.2

bgp4+_1

Router 1

awplus#

configure terminal

Enter the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config)#

interface vlan1

Specify the interface (vlan1) to configure an IPv6 global address.

awplus(config-if)#

ipv6 address 2001:db8::10/48

Specify the IPv6 global address 2001:db8::10/48on interface

vlan1.

awplus(config-if)#

exit

Leave Interface Configuration mode and enter Global

Configuration mode.

awplus(config)#

router bgp 200

Define the BGP4+ routing process. The number 200specifies the

AS number of Router 1.

awplus(config-router)#

bgp router-id 10.10.10.1

Configure a fixed Router ID (10.10.10.1) for the BGP4+ routing

process.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

2.23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

awplus(config-router#

neighbor 2001:db8::11 remote-

as 200

Define BGP4+ neighbor Router 2, and establish a TCP session by

specifying the global unicast IPv6 address (2001:db8::11) and

the AS number (200) of neighbor Router 2.

awplus(config-router)#

address-family ipv6

Enter IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode for configuring

routing sessions that use IPv6 address prefixes.

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 2001:db8::11 activate

Activate the exchange of information to the peer (neighbor)

Router 2 (2001:db8::11) and enable the exchange of IPv6

address prefix types with this neighbor. Note that other

information apart from prefixes is sent in updates. This command

activates the exchange of information for the peer defined.

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit-address-family

Exit IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode, and return to the

Router Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

exit

Exit the Router Configuration mode, and return to the Global

Configuration mode.

Router 2

awplus#

configure terminal

Enter the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config)#

interface vlan1

Specify the interface (vlan1) to configure an IPv6 global

address.

awplus(config-if)#

ipv6 address 2001:db8::11/48

Specify the IPv6 global unicast address 2001:db8::10/

48on interface vlan1.

awplus(config-if)#

exit

Leave Interface Configuration mode and enter Global

Configuration mode.

awplus(config)#

router bgp 200

Define the BGP4+ routing process. The number 200

specifies the AS number of Router 2.

awplus(config-router)#

bgp router-id 10.10.10.2

Configure a fixed Router ID (2001:db8::10) for the

BGP4+ routing process.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

2.24

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

awplus(config-router#

neighbor 2001:db8::10 remote-as 200

Define BGP4+ neighbor Router 1, and establish a TCP

session by specifying the global IPv6 address

(2001:db8::10) and the AS number (200) of neighbor

Router 1.

awplus(config-router)#

address-family ipv6

Enter IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode for

configuring routing sessions that use IPv6 address

prefixes.

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 2001:db8::10 activate

Activate the exchange of information to the peer

(neighbor) Router 1 (2001:db8::10) and enable the

exchange of IPv6 address prefix types with this neighbor.

Note that other information apart from prefixes is sent in

updates. This command activates the exchange of

information for the peer defined.

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit-address-family

Exit IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode, and return

to the Router Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

exit

Exit the Router Configuration mode, and return to the

Global Configuration mode.

Names of Commands Used

Validation Commands

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

2.25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

Enabling iBGP Peering using a Link-local Address

This example shows the minimum configuration required for enabling iBGP on a VLAN

interface. Router 1 and Router 2 are BGP4+ Peers in in the same Autonomous System

(AS), 200, connected to link local network fe80::/10.

First, define the BGP4+ routing process, then define the AS number for the routers. Next,

configure a Router ID for the BGP4+ routing process, then define BGP4+ neighbors to start

exchanging routing updates.

AS200

fe80::1

vlan1

vlan2

fe80::2

Router 1

Router 2

Router ID 10.10.10.11

Router ID 10.10.10.12

bgp4+_2

Router 1

awplus#

configure terminal

Enter the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config)#

router bgp 200

Define the BGP4+ routing process. The number 200specifies the

AS number of Router 1.

awplus(config-router)#

bgp router-id 10.10.10.11

Configure a fixed Router ID (10.10.10.11) for the BGP4+

routing process.

awplus(config-router#

neighbor fe80::2 remote-as 200

Define BGP4+ neighbor Router 2, and establish a TCP session by

specifying the link-local IPv6 address (fe80::2) and the AS

number (200) of neighbor Router 2.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

2.26

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

awplus(config-router#

neighbor fe80::2 interface

vlan1

Specify a link-local neighbor, and configure the interface name of

the neighbor (fe80::2).

awplus(config-router)#

address-family ipv6

Enter IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode for configuring

routing sessions that use IPv6 address prefixes.

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor fe80:2 activate

Activate the exchange of information to the peer (neighbor)

Router 2 (fe80::2) and enable the exchange of IPv6 address

prefix types with this neighbor. Note that other information apart

from prefixes is sent in updates. This command activates the

exchange of information for the peer defined.

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit-address-family

Exit IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode, and return to the

Router Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

exit

Exit the Router Configuration mode, and return to the Global

Configuration mode.

Router 2

awplus#

configure terminal

Enter the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config)#

router bgp 200

Define the BGP4+ routing process. The number 200

specifies the AS number of Router 2.

awplus(config-router)#

bgp router-id 10.10.10.12

Configure a fixed Router ID (10.10.10.12) for the

BGP4+ routing process.

awplus(config-router#

neighbor fe80::1 remote-as 200

Define BGP4+ neighbor Router 1, and establish a TCP

session by specifying the link-local IPv6 address

(fe80::1) and the AS number (200) of neighbor Router

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

2.27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

awplus(config-router#

neighbor fe80::1 interface vlan2

Specify a link-local neighbor, and configure the interface

name of the neighbor (fe80::1).

awplus(config-router)#

address-family ipv6

Enter IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode for

configuring routing sessions that use IPv6 address

prefixes.

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor fe80::1 activate

Activate the exchange of information to the peer

(neighbor) Router 1 (fe80::1) and enable the exchange

of IPv6 address prefix types with this neighbor. Note that

other information apart from prefixes is sent in updates.

This command activates the exchange of information for

the peer defined.

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit-address-family

Exit IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode, and return

to the Router Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

exit

Exit the Router Configuration mode, and return to the

Global Configuration mode.

Names of Commands Used

Validation Commands

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

2.28

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

Enabling eBGP Peering between different

Autonomous Systems

This example shows the minimum configuration required to enable eBGP on a VLAN

interface, when the routers belong to different Autonomous Systems. Router 1 and

Router 2 are two routers in different Autonomous Systems, 200and 300, connecting to

network 2001:db8::/64.

AS200

AS300

2001:db8::80:1

2001:db8::80:2

Router 1

Router 2

Router ID 10.10.10.11

Router ID 10.10.10.12

bgp4+_3

Router 1

awplus#

configure terminal

Enter the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config)#

router bgp 200

Define the BGP4+ routing process. The number 200specifies the

AS number of Router 1.

awplus(config-router)#

bgp router-id 10.10.10.11

Configure a fixed Router ID (10.10.10.11) for the BGP4+

routing process.

awplus(config-router#

neighbor 2001:db8::80:2

remote-as 300

Define BGP4+ neighbor Router 2, and establish a TCP session by

specifying the global unicast IPv6 address (2001:db8::80:2)

and the AS number (300) of neighbor Router 2.

awplus(config-router)#

address-family ipv6

Enter IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode for configuring

routing sessions that use IPv6 address prefixes.

awplus(config-router-af)#

Activate the exchange of information to the peer (neighbor)

Router 2 (2001:db8::80:2) and enable the exchange of IPv6

address prefix types with this neighbor. Note that other

information apart from prefixes is sent in updates. This command

activates the exchange of information for the peer defined.

neighbor 2001:db8::80:2

activate

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit-address-family

Exit IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode, and return to the

Router Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

exit

Exit the Router Configuration mode, and return to the Global

Configuration mode.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

2.29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

Router 2

awplus#

configure terminal

Enter the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config)#

router bgp 300

Define the BGP4+ routing process. The number 300

specifies the AS number of Router 2.

awplus(config-router)#

bgp router-id 10.10.10.12

Configure a fixed Router ID (10.10.10.12) for the

BGP4+ routing process.

awplus(config-router#

neighbor 2001:db8::80:1 remote-as

200

Define BGP4+ neighbor Router 1, and establish a TCP

session by specifying the global unicast IPv6 address

(2001:db8::80:1) and the AS number (200) of

neighbor Router 1.

awplus(config-router)#

address-family ipv6

Enter IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode for

configuring routing sessions that use IPv6 address

prefixes.

awplus(config-router-af)#

Activate the exchange of information to the peer

(neighbor) Router 1 (2001:db8::80:1) and enable the

exchange of IPv6 address prefix types with this neighbor.

Note that other information apart from prefixes is sent in

updates. This command activates the exchange of

information for the peer defined.

neighbor 2001:db8::80:1 activate

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit-address-family

Exit IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode, and return

to the Router Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

exit

Exit the Router Configuration mode, and return to the

Global Configuration mode.

Names of Commands Used

Validation Commands

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

2.30

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

Configuring Route-Maps with BGP4+

Use route-maps to filter incoming updates from a BGP4+ peer. In this example, a prefix-list

named list1on Router 1 is configured to deny entry of any routes with the IPv6 address

2001::db8:12::/48. To test the route-map filter , Router 2 is configured to advertise

IPv6 network prefixes 2001:db8:11::/48and 2001:db8:12::/48.

Use the showbgpipv6command on Router 1 to verify only the 2001:db8:11::/48

network prefix has been installed in the BGP table.

AS10

AS11

2001:db8::10:10

2001:db8::10:11

Router 1

Router 2

Router ID 192.168.10.11

Router ID 192.168.10.10

bgp4+_4

Router 1

awplus#

configure terminal

Enter the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config)#

ipv6 prefix-list FILTER_LIST_IN

seq 5 deny 2001:db8:12::/48

Create an entry in the prefix-list named FILTER_LIST_IN

for the route-map. 5 specifies the sequence number or

position of this specific route-map. denyspecifies that

prefixes will be rejected. permitspecifies that prefixes will

be allowed. 48and 64are the minimum and maximum prefix

lengths, respectively, to be matched for this route-map. The

prefix-list permits or denies selected prefixes from being

installed in the BGP table, when used in a route map with the

route map applied to the peering.

awplus(config)#

ipv6 prefix-list FILTER_LIST_IN

seq 10 permit any

Create another entry in the prefix-list named

FILTER_LIST_INfor the route-map. 10specifies the

sequence number or position of this specific route-map.

permit anyspecifies prefix-list FILTER_LIST_INto

accept all prefixes of any length. The prefix-list permits or

denies selected prefixes from being installed in the BGP table,

when used in a route map with the route map applied to the

peering.

awplus(config#

route-map FILTER_BGP_IN_MAP

permit 1

Enter the Route-map Configuration mode from the Global

Configuration mode and creates the route-map named

FILTER_BGP_IN_MAP. The route-map matches on the

prefix-list.

awplus(config-route-map)#

match ipv6 address prefix-list

FILTER_LIST_IN

Set the match criteria for the route-map. In this case, if the

route-map name matches FILTER_LIST_IN, then the first

sequence 5 denies prefixes and the second sequence 10

accepts prefixes.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

2.31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

awplus(config-router-map)#

exit

Exit the Route-map Configuration mode and return to the

Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

Define the routing process, where 10is the Autonomous

System (AS) number for Router 1.

awplus(config-router)#

bgp router-id 192.168.10.10

Configure a fixed Router ID (192.168.10.10) for the BGP4+

routing process.

awplus(config-router#

neighbor 2001:db8::10:11

remote-as 11

Define BGP neighbor Router 2, and establish a TCP session by

specifying the global unicast IPv6 address

(2001:db8::10:11) and the AS number (11) of neighbor

Router 2.

awplus(config-router)#

address-family ipv6

Enter IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode for configuring

routing sessions that use IPv6 address prefixes.

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 2001:db8::10:11

route-map list1 in

Apply the route-map list1to all incoming routes.

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 2001:db8::10:11

activate

Activate the neighbor Router 2 (2001:db8::10:11), and

enable the exchange of IPv6 address prefix types with this

neighbor. Note that other information apart from prefixes is

sent in updates. This command activates the exchange of

information for the peer defined.

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit-address-family

Exit IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode, and return to

the Router Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

exit

Exit the Router Configuration mode, and return to the Global

Configuration mode.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

2.32

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

Router 2

awplus#

configure terminal

Enter the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config)#

router bgp 11

Define the BGP4+ routing process. The number 11

specifies the Autonomous System (AS) number of Router

awplus(config-router)#

bgp router-id 192.168.10.11

Configure a fixed Router ID (192.168.10.11) for the

BGP4+ routing process.

awplus(config-router#

neighbor 2001:db8::10:10 remote-as

Define BGP4+ neighbor Router 1, and establish a TCP

session by specifying the global unicast IPv6 address

(2001:db8::10:10) and the AS number (10) of

neighbor Router 1.

awplus(config-router)#

address-family ipv6

Enter IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode for

configuring routing sessions that use IPv6 address

prefixes.

awplus(config-router-af)#

network 2001:db8:11::/48

Announces IPv6 network prefix 2001:db8:11::/48.

Running show ipv6 bgpcommand on Router 1

displays Router 1 receiving 2001:db8:11::/48

packets.

awplus(config-router-af)#

network 2001:db8:12::/48

Announces IPv6 network prefix 2001:db8:12::/48.

Running show ipv6 bgpcommand on Router 1

displays Router 1 rejecting 2001:db8:12::/48

packets.

awplus(config-router-af)#

Activate the exchange of information to the peer

(neighbor) Router 1 (2001:db8::10:10) and enable

the exchange of IPv6 address prefix types with this

neighbor. Note that other information apart from prefixes

is sent in updates. This command activates the exchange

of information for the peer defined.

neighbor 2001:db8::10:10 activate

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit-address-family

Exit IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode, and return

to the Router Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

exit

Exit the Router Configuration mode, and return to the

Global Configuration mode.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

2.33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

Names of Commands Used

network (BGP and BGP4+)

Validation Commands

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

2.34

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

Configuring BGP4+ Graceful Restart

Using BGP4+ graceful restart, the data forwarding plane of the device can continue to

process and forward packets even if the control plane, which is responsible for

determining best paths, fails.

The bgp graceful-restart (BGP and BGP4+) command on page 3.32 sets the maximum

time that a graceful-restart neighbor waits to come back up after a restart. This value is

applied to all neighbors unless you explicitly override it by configuring the corresponding

value on the neighbor.

This example shows configuring BGP4+ graceful restart.

AS100

AS200

2001:db8::10:10

2001:db8::10:11

Router 1

Router ID 192.168.10.10

Router 2

Router ID 192.168.10.11

bgp4+_5

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

2.35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

Router 1

awplus(config)#

configure terminal

Enter the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

router bgp 100

Define the BGP4+ routing process.

The number 100specifies the AS number of Router 1.

awplus(config-router)#

bgp router-id 192.168.10.10

Configure a fixed Router ID (192.168.10.10) for the

BGP4+ routing process.

awplus(config-router)#

bgp graceful-restart

Enable BGP4+ graceful restart support. If the restart and

stale-path timers are not configured, the defaults are 90

seconds and 360 seconds, respectively.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:db8::10:11 remote-as

200

Specify the neighbor’s IPv6 address (2001:db8::10:11)

and the Autonomous System (AS) number of the neighbor

(200) Router 2. Router 2 is the neighbor of Router 1.

This command defines BGP neighbor Router 2, and

establishes a TCP session by specifying the global unicast

IPv6 address and AS number of the neighbor.

awplus(config-router)#

address-family ipv6 unicast

Exchange the IPv6 capabilities, and move from Router

Configuration mode to IPv6 Address Family Configuration

mode.

awplus(config-router-af)#

Activate the exchange of information to the peer (neighbor)

with the IPv6 address (2001:db8::10:11) (Router 2).

Note that other information apart from prefixes is sent in

updates. This command activates the exchange of

information for the peer defined.

neighbor 2001:db8::10:11 activate

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 2001:db8::10:11

capability graceful-restart

Specify the neighbor’s IPv6 address (2001:db8::10:11),

for which the graceful restart capability function is

supported. This command advertises the graceful restart

capability to the peer.

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit-address-family

Exit IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode, and return to

the Router Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

exit

Exit the Router Configuration mode, and return to the

Global Configuration mode.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

2.36

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

Router 2

awplus(config)#

configure terminal

Enter the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

router bgp 200

Define the BGP4+ routing process. The number 200

specifies the AS number of Router 2.

awplus(config-router)#

bgp router-id 192.168.10.11

Configure a fixed Router ID (192.168.10.11) for the

BGP4+ routing process.

awplus(config-router)#

bgp graceful-restart

Enable BGP4+ graceful restart support.

awplus(config-router)#

bgp graceful-restart restart-time

120

Configure the maximum time in seconds (120) required

for neighbor(s) to restart.

awplus(config-router)#

bgp graceful-restart stalepath-time

120

Configure the maximum time in seconds (120) to retain

stale paths from the restarting neighbor(s).

awplus(config-router)#

bgp update-delay 120

Configure the maximum time in seconds (120) to defer

initial route selection.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:db8::10:10 remote-as

100

Specify the neighbor’s global unicast IPv6 address

(2001:db8::10:10) and the AS number of the

neighbor (100) Router 1. Router 1 is the neighbor of

Router 2. This command defines BGP neighbor Router 1,

and establishes a TCP session by specifying the global

unicast IPv6 address and AS number of the neighbor.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

2.37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

awplus(config-router)#

address-family ipv6 unicast

Exchange the IPv6 capabilities, and move from Router

Configuration mode to IPv6 Address Family Configuration

mode.

awplus(config-router-af)#

Activate the exchange of information to the peer

(neighbor) with the global unicast IPv6 address

(2001:db8::10:10) (Router 1). Note that other

information apart from prefixes is sent in updates. This

command activates the exchange of information for the

peer defined.

neighbor 2001:db8::10:10 activate

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 2001:db8::10:10 capability

graceful-restart

Specify the neighbor’s global unicast IPv6 address

(2001:db8::10:10), for which the graceful restart

capability function is supported. This command

advertises the graceful restart capability to the peer.

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit-address-family

Exit IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode, and return

to the Router Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

exit

Exit the Router Configuration mode, and return to the

Global Configuration mode.

Names of Commands Used

bgp graceful-restart graceful-reset (BGP and BGP4+)

bgp update-delay (BGP and BGP4+)

neighbor capability graceful-restart (BGP and BGP4+)

Validation Commands

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

2.38

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

Configuring BGP4+ Distance

You can configure administrative distance in BGP4+ for a specific address family.

This example shows configuring the BGP4+ distance for the IPv6 Address Family.

AS100

AS200

2001:db8::121

2001:db8::120

2001:db8::114

2001:db8::115

Router 1

Router 2

Router 3

2001:db8:132::/64

2001:db8:99::/64

bgp4+_distance

Router 1

awplus(config)#

configure terminal

Enter the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

router bgp 100

Define the BGP4+ routing process. The number 100

specifies the AS number of Router 1.

awplus(config-router)#

network 2001:db8:132::/64

Specify the network 2001:db8:132::/64to be

advertised by the BGP4+ routing process from Router 1

to Router 2.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

2.39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:db8::120 remote-as

100

Specify the neighbor’s IPv6 address (2001:db::120)

and Autonomous System (AS) number (100). Router 2 is

the neighbor of Router 1. This command defines BGP

neighbor Router 2, and establishes a TCP session by

specifying the global unicast IPv6 address and the AS

number of the neighbor.

awplus(config-router)#

address-family ipv6 unicast

Enter the IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode from

the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router-af)#

Activate the exchange of information to the peer

(neighbor) with the global unicast IPv6 address

2001:db::120for Router 2. Note that other

information apart from prefixes is sent in updates. This

command activates the exchange of information for the

peer defined.

neighbor 2001:db8::120 activate

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit-address-family

Exit IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode, and return

to the Router Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

exit

Exit the Router Configuration mode, and return to the

Global Configuration mode.

Router 2

awplus(config)#

configure terminal

Enter the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

router bgp 100

Define the BGP4+ routing process. The number 100

specifies the AS number of Router 2.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:db8::121 remote-as

100

Specify the neighbor’s global unicast IPv6 address

(2001:db8::121) and Autonomous System (AS)

number (100). Router 1 is a neighbor of Router 2. This

command defines BGP4+ neighbor Router 1, and

establishes a TCP session by specifying the global unicast

IPv6 address and the AS number of the neighbor.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:db8::115 remote-as

200

Specify the neighbor’s global unicast IPv6 address

(2001:db8::115) (and Autonomous System (AS)

number (200). Router 3 is a neighbor of Router 2. This

command defines BGP4+ neighbor Router 3, and

establishes a TCP session by specifying the global unicast

IPv6 address and the AS number of the neighbor.

awplus(config-router)#

address-family ipv6 unicast

Enter the IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode from

the Global Configuration mode.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

2.40

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

awplus(config-router-af)#

aggregate-address 2001:db8::102/64

summary-only

Configure an IPv6 non-AS-set aggregate route on Router

2. Note that the local distance gets applied to this route.

awplus(config-router-af)#

Activate the exchange of information to the peer

(neighbor) with the global unicast IPv6 address

2001:db::121for Router 1. Note that other

information apart from prefixes is sent in updates. This

command activates the exchange of information for the

peer defined.

neighbor 2001:db8::121 activate

awplus(config-router-af)#

Activate the exchange of information to the peer

(neighbor) with the global unicast IPv6 address

2001:db8::115for Router 3. Note that other

information apart from prefixes is sent in updates. This

command activates the exchange of information for the

peer defined.

neighbor 2001:db8::115 activate

awplus(config-router-af)#

distance 12 13 11

Configure the administrative distance for external,

internal, and local routes received in IPv6 Address Family

Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit-address-family

Exit IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode, and return

to the Router Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

exit

Exit the Router Configuration mode, and return to the

Global Configuration mode.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

2.41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

Router 3

awplus(config)#

configure terminal

Enter the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

router bgp 200

Define the BGP4+ routing process. The number 100

specifies the AS number of Router 3.

awplus(config-router)#

network 2001:db8:99::/64

Specify the network 2001:db8:99::/64to be

advertised by the BGP4+ routing process from Router 3

to Router 2.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:db8::114 remote-as

100

Specify the neighbor’s global unicast IPv6 address

(2001:db8::114) (and Autonomous System (AS)

number (100). Router 2 is a neighbor of Router 3. This

command defines BGP4+ neighbor Router 2, and

establishes a TCP session by specifying the global unicast

IPv6 address and the AS number of the neighbor.

awplus(config-router)#

address-family ipv6 unicast

Enter the IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode from

the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router-af)#

Activate the exchange of information to the peer

(neighbor) with the global unicast IPv6 address

2001:db::114for Router 2. Note that other

information apart from prefixes is sent in updates. This

command activates the exchange of information for the

peer defined.

neighbor 2001:db8::114 activate

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit-address-family

Exit IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode, and return

to the Router Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

exit

Exit the Router Configuration mode, and return to the

Global Configuration mode.

Names of Commands Used

aggregate-address (BGP and BGP4+)

network (BGP and BGP4+)

Validation Commands

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

2.42

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

Configuring BGP4+ Graceful Reset

The graceful restart feature for BGP4+ session reset is used so that any changes in network

configuration do not affect packet forwarding. The bgp graceful-restart graceful-reset

(BGP and BGP4+) command on page 3.33 invokes graceful restart only when a

configuration change forces a peer reset.

This example shows configuring BGP4+ graceful reset.

AS200

AS100

2001:db8::119

2001:db8::120

Router 1

Router ID 192.168.10.10

Router 2

Router ID 192.168.10.11

bgp4+_7

Router 1

awplus(config)#

configure terminal

Enter the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

router bgp 100

Define the BGP4+ routing process. The number 100

specifies the AS number of Router 1.

awplus(config-router)#

bgp router-id 192.168.10.10

Configure a fixed Router ID (192.168.10.10) for the

BGP4+ routing process.

awplus(config-router)#

bgp graceful-restart

Enable BGP4+ graceful restart support.

awplus(config-router)#

bgp graceful-restart graceful-reset

Configure to invoke graceful restart when a configuration

change forces a peer reset.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:db8::120 remote-as

200

Specify the neighbor’s IPv6 address (2001:db::120)

and the AS number of the neighbor (200).

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

2.43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

awplus(config-router)#

address-family ipv6 unicast

Enter the IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode from

the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router-af)#

Activate the exchange of information to the peer

(neighbor) with the IPv6 address 2001:db::120for

Router 2. Note that other information apart from prefixes

is sent in updates. This command activates the exchange

of information for the peer defined.

neighbor 2001:db8::120 activate

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 2001:db8::120 capability

graceful-restart

Specify the neighbor’s global unicast IPv6 address

(2001:db::120) for which the graceful restart

capability is supported. This command advertises the

graceful restart capability to the peer.

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit-address-family

Exit IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode, and return

to the Router Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

exit

Exit the Router Configuration mode, and return to the

Global Configuration mode.

Router 2

awplus(config)#

configure terminal

Enter the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

router bgp 200

Define the BGP4+ routing process.

The number 200specifies the AS number of Router 2.

awplus(config-router)#

bgp router-id 192.168.10.10

Configure a fixed Router ID (192.168.10.10) for the

BGP4+ routing process.

awplus(config-router)#

bgp graceful-restart

Enable BGP4+ graceful restart support.

awplus(config-router)#

bgp graceful-restart graceful-reset

Configure to invoke graceful restart when a configuration

change forces a peer reset.

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:db8::119 remote-as

100

Specify the neighbor’s IPv6 address (2001:db::119)

and the AS number of the neighbor (100).

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

2.44

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

awplus(config-router)#

address-family ipv6 unicast

Enter the IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode from

the Global Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router-af)#

Activate the exchange of information to the peer

(neighbor) with the global unicast IPv6 address

2001:db::119for Router 1. Note that other

information apart from prefixes is sent in updates. This

command activates the exchange of information for the

peer defined.

neighbor 2001:db8::119 activate

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 2001:db8::119 capability

graceful-restart

Specify the neighbor’s global unicast IPv6 address

(2001:db::119) for which the graceful restart

capability is supported. This command advertises the

graceful restart capability to the peer.

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit-address-family

Exit IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode, and return

to the Router Configuration mode.

awplus(config-router)#

exit

Exit the Router Configuration mode, and return to the

Global Configuration mode.

Names of Commands Used

bgp graceful-restart graceful-reset (BGP and BGP4+)

neighbor capability graceful-restart (BGP and BGP4+)

Validation Commands

Introduction ...........................................................................................................................................3.5

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

2.45

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Configuration

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

2.46

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3: BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Controlling “show” Command Output.........................................................................................3.6

Command List .......................................................................................................................................3.8

address-family (BGP and BGP4+)....................................................................................................3.8

aggregate-address (BGP and BGP4+)........................................................................................ 3.10

auto-summary (BGP)........................................................................................................................ 3.12

bgp aggregate-nexthop-check (BGP and BGP4+) ................................................................ 3.13

bgp always-compare-med (BGP and BGP4+) ......................................................................... 3.14

bgp bestpath as-path ignore (BGP and BGP4+) .................................................................... 3.15

bgp bestpath compare-confed-aspath (BGP and BGP4+)................................................. 3.15

bgp bestpath compare-routerid (BGP and BGP4+).............................................................. 3.16

bgp bestpath med (BGP and BGP4+) ........................................................................................ 3.17

bgp bestpath med remove-recv-med (BGP and BGP4+) ................................................... 3.18

bgp bestpath med remove-send-med (BGP and BGP4+) .................................................. 3.18

bgp client-to-client reflection (BGP and BGP4+)................................................................... 3.19

bgp cluster-id (BGP and BGP4+).................................................................................................. 3.20

bgp confederation identifier (BGP and BGP4+)..................................................................... 3.21

bgp confederation peers (BGP and BGP4+) ............................................................................ 3.22

bgp config-type (BGP and BGP4+) ............................................................................................. 3.24

bgp dampening (BGP and BGP4+) ............................................................................................. 3.26

bgp default ipv4-unicast (BGP and BGP4+)............................................................................. 3.27

bgp default local-preference (BGP) ............................................................................................ 3.28

bgp deterministic-med (BGP and BGP4+)................................................................................ 3.29

bgp enforce-first-as (BGP and BGP4+)....................................................................................... 3.30

bgp fast-external-failover (BGP and BGP4+) ........................................................................... 3.31

bgp graceful-restart (BGP and BGP4+)...................................................................................... 3.32

bgp graceful-restart graceful-reset (BGP and BGP4+)......................................................... 3.33

bgp log-neighbor-changes (BGP and BGP4+)........................................................................ 3.34

bgp memory maxallocation (BGP and BGP4+) ...................................................................... 3.36

bgp nexthop-trigger-count (BGP and BGP4+) ....................................................................... 3.37

bgp nexthop-trigger delay (BGP and BGP4+)......................................................................... 3.38

bgp nexthop-trigger enable (BGP and BGP4+)...................................................................... 3.39

bgp rfc1771-path-select (BGP) ..................................................................................................... 3.40

bgp rfc1771-strict (BGP).................................................................................................................. 3.40

bgp router-id (BGP and BGP4+)................................................................................................... 3.41

bgp scan-time (BGP) ........................................................................................................................ 3.42

bgp update-delay (BGP and BGP4+).......................................................................................... 3.43

clear bgp * (BGP and BGP4+)........................................................................................................ 3.44

clear bgp (IPv4 or IPv6 address) (BGP and BGP4+) ............................................................... 3.45

clear bgp (ASN) (BGP and BGP4+)............................................................................................... 3.47

clear bgp external (BGP and BGP4+).......................................................................................... 3.48

clear bgp peer-group (BGP and BGP4+)................................................................................... 3.49

clear ip bgp * (BGP)........................................................................................................................... 3.50

clear ip bgp (IPv4) (BGP) ................................................................................................................. 3.52

clear ip bgp dampening (BGP) ..................................................................................................... 3.53

clear ip bgp flap-statistics (BGP) .................................................................................................. 3.53

clear ip bgp (ASN) (BGP) ................................................................................................................. 3.54

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

clear ip bgp external (BGP) ............................................................................................................ 3.55

clear ip bgp peer-group (BGP)...................................................................................................... 3.56

clear bgp ipv6 (ipv6 address) (BGP4+) ...................................................................................... 3.57

clear bgp ipv6 dampening (BGP4+)........................................................................................... 3.58

clear bgp ipv6 flap-statistics (BGP4+)........................................................................................ 3.58

clear bgp ipv6 (ASN) (BGP4+)....................................................................................................... 3.59

clear bgp ipv6 external (BGP4+).................................................................................................. 3.60

clear bgp ipv6 peer-group (BGP4+) ........................................................................................... 3.61

debug bgp (BGP)............................................................................................................................... 3.62

distance (BGP and BGP4+)............................................................................................................. 3.63

exit-address-family (BGP and BGP4+)........................................................................................ 3.65

ip as-path access-list (BGP and BGP4+)..................................................................................... 3.66

ip community-list (BGP and BGP4+) .......................................................................................... 3.67

ip community-list expanded (BGP and BGP4+) ..................................................................... 3.68

ip community-list standard (BGP and BGP4+)........................................................................ 3.70

ip extcommunity-list expanded (BGP and BGP4+)............................................................... 3.72

ip extcommunity-list standard (BGP and BGP4+) ................................................................. 3.74

ip prefix-list (IPv4 Prefix List )......................................................................................................... 3.76

ipv6 prefix-list (IPv6 Prefix List) .................................................................................................... 3.78

match as-path (Route Map)........................................................................................................... 3.80

match community (Route Map)................................................................................................... 3.81

neighbor activate (BGP and BGP4+) .......................................................................................... 3.82

neighbor advertisement-interval (BGP and BGP4+) ............................................................ 3.85

neighbor allowas-in (BGP and BGP4+)...................................................................................... 3.88

neighbor as-origination-interval (BGP and BGP4+).............................................................. 3.91

neighbor attribute-unchanged (BGP and BGP4+)................................................................ 3.93

neighbor capability graceful-restart (BGP and BGP4+)....................................................... 3.96

neighbor capability orf prefix-list (BGP and BGP4+) ............................................................ 3.99

neighbor capability route-refresh (BGP and BGP4+) .........................................................3.102

neighbor collide-established (BGP and BGP4+) ..................................................................3.105

neighbor default-originate (BGP and BGP4+) ......................................................................3.107

neighbor description (BGP and BGP4+) .................................................................................3.110

neighbor disallow-infinite-holdtime (BGP and BGP4+)....................................................3.112

neighbor distribute-list (BGP and BGP4+) .............................................................................3.114

neighbor dont-capability-negotiate (BGP and BGP4+) ....................................................3.117

neighbor ebgp-multihop (BGP and BGP4+) .........................................................................3.119

neighbor enforce-multihop (BGP and BGP4+).....................................................................3.122

neighbor filter-list (BGP and BGP4+)........................................................................................3.125

neighbor interface (BGP4+).........................................................................................................3.128

neighbor local-as (BGP and BGP4+).........................................................................................3.129

neighbor maximum-prefix (BGP and BGP4+).......................................................................3.131

neighbor next-hop-self (BGP and BGP4+) .............................................................................3.134

neighbor override-capability (BGP and BGP4+) ..................................................................3.137

neighbor passive (BGP and BGP4+) .........................................................................................3.139

neighbor password (BGP and BGP4+).....................................................................................3.141

neighbor peer-group (add a neighbor) (BGP and BGP+) .................................................3.144

neighbor peer-group (create a peer-group) (BGP and BGP4+)......................................3.146

neighbor port (BGP and BGP4+)................................................................................................3.147

neighbor prefix-list (BGP and BGP4+) .....................................................................................3.149

neighbor remote-as (BGP and BGP4+)....................................................................................3.152

neighbor remove-private-AS (BGP)..........................................................................................3.155

neighbor restart-time (BGP and BGP4+).................................................................................3.156

neighbor route-map (BGP and BGP4+)...................................................................................3.159

neighbor route-reflector-client (BGP)......................................................................................3.164

neighbor route-server-client (BGP) ..........................................................................................3.165

neighbor send-community (BGP and BGP4+)......................................................................3.166

neighbor shutdown (BGP and BGP4+)....................................................................................3.170

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.2

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor soft-reconfiguration inbound (BGP and BGP4+) .............................................3.172

neighbor timers (BGP and BGP4+)............................................................................................3.175

neighbor transparent-as (BGP and BGP4+)...........................................................................3.178

neighbor transparent-nexthop (BGP and BGP4+) ..............................................................3.180

neighbor unsuppress-map (BGP and BGP4+) ......................................................................3.182

neighbor update-source (BGP and BGP4+)...........................................................................3.185

neighbor version (BGP ).................................................................................................................3.188

neighbor weight (BGP and BGP4+) ..........................................................................................3.190

network (BGP and BGP4+)...........................................................................................................3.193

network synchronization (BGP and BGP4+)..........................................................................3.196

redistribute (into BGP or BGP4+) (BGP and BGP4+) ...........................................................3.197

restart bgp graceful (BGP)............................................................................................................3.199

router bgp (BGP and BGP4+) ......................................................................................................3.200

route-map (Route Map) ................................................................................................................3.201

set as-path (Route Map)................................................................................................................3.203

set community (Route Map) .......................................................................................................3.204

show bgp ipv6 (BGP4+) ................................................................................................................3.205

show bgp ipv6 community (BGP4+)........................................................................................3.206

show bgp ipv6 community-list (BGP4+).................................................................................3.207

show bgp ipv6 dampening (BGP4+)........................................................................................3.208

show bgp ipv6 filter-list (BGP4+)...............................................................................................3.209

show bgp ipv6 inconsistent-as (BGP4+).................................................................................3.209

show bgp ipv6 longer-prefixes (BGP4+).................................................................................3.210

show bgp ipv6 neighbors (BGP4+)...........................................................................................3.211

show bgp ipv6 paths (BGP4+)....................................................................................................3.214

show bgp ipv6 prefix-list (BGP4+) ............................................................................................3.214

show bgp ipv6 quote-regexp (BGP4+)....................................................................................3.215

show bgp ipv6 regexp (BGP4+).................................................................................................3.216

show bgp ipv6 route-map (BGP4+)..........................................................................................3.217

show bgp ipv6 summary (BGP4+) ............................................................................................3.217

show bgp nexthop-tracking (BGP) ...........................................................................................3.218

show bgp nexthop-tree-details (BGP ).....................................................................................3.218

show bgp memory maxallocation (BGP)................................................................................3.218

show debugging bgp (BGP)........................................................................................................3.219

show ip bgp (BGP) ..........................................................................................................................3.220

show ip bgp attribute-info (BGP) ..............................................................................................3.221

show ip bgp cidr-only (BGP) .......................................................................................................3.222

show ip bgp community (BGP) ..................................................................................................3.223

show ip bgp community-info (BGP).........................................................................................3.224

show ip bgp community-list (BGP)...........................................................................................3.225

show ip bgp dampening (BGP)..................................................................................................3.226

show ip bgp filter-list (BGP).........................................................................................................3.228

show ip bgp inconsistent-as (BGP )...........................................................................................3.229

show ip bgp longer-prefixes (BGP)...........................................................................................3.230

show ip bgp neighbors (BGP).....................................................................................................3.231

show ip bgp neighbors connection-retrytime (BGP).........................................................3.234

show ip bgp neighbors hold-time (BGP )................................................................................3.234

show ip bgp neighbors keepalive (BGP).................................................................................3.235

show ip bgp neighbors keepalive-interval (BGP)................................................................3.235

show ip bgp neighbors notification (BGP).............................................................................3.236

show ip bgp neighbors open (BGP) .........................................................................................3.236

show ip bgp neighbors rcvd-msgs (BGP )...............................................................................3.237

show ip bgp neighbors sent-msgs (BGP) ...............................................................................3.237

show ip bgp neighbors update (BGP) .....................................................................................3.238

show ip bgp paths (BGP )..............................................................................................................3.238

show ip bgp prefix-list (BGP).......................................................................................................3.239

show ip bgp quote-regexp (BGP)..............................................................................................3.240

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

show ip bgp regexp (BGP) ...........................................................................................................3.241

show ip bgp route-map (BGP)....................................................................................................3.242

show ip bgp scan (BGP) ................................................................................................................3.243

show ip bgp summary (BGP).......................................................................................................3.244

show ip community-list (BGP and BGP4+).............................................................................3.245

show ip extcommunity-list (BGP and BGP4+) ......................................................................3.245

show ip prefix-list (IPv4 Prefix List) ...........................................................................................3.246

show ipv6 prefix-list (IPv6 Prefix List) ......................................................................................3.246

show ip protocols bgp (BGP) ......................................................................................................3.247

show route-map (Route Map) ....................................................................................................3.248

synchronization (BGP and BGP4+)............................................................................................3.249

timers (BGP and BGP4+) ...............................................................................................................3.250

undebug bgp (BGP) .......................................................................................................................3.251

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.4

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Introduction

This chapter provides an alphabetical reference of commands used to configure the

Border Gateway Protocol for IPv4 (BGP) and for IPv6 (BGP4+).

For basic BGP and BGP4+ introduction information, including terminology and concepts

about BGP and BGP4+, including the concept of autonomous system numbers (ASN), path

attributes (PA), and both internal and external BGP/BGP4+, see Chapter 1, BGP and

BGP4+ Introduction.

For basic BGP and BGP4+ configuration examples, see Chapter 2, BGP and BGP4+

Configuration.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Controlling “show” Command Output

You can control the output of show commands by using the | and > or >> tokens in the

following ways:

■

To display only part of the output, follow the command with | and then other

keywords (see Output Modifiers below)

■

To save the output to a file, follow the command with > filename

To append the output to an existing file, follow the command with >> filename

Using the ? after typing the show command displays the following information about

these tokens:

show users

awplus#

| Output modifiers

> Output redirection

>> Output redirection (append)

Output Modifiers Type the | (vertical bar) to use Output modifiers.

append

begin

Append output

Begin with the first line that contains

matching output

exclude Exclude lines that contain matching output

include Include lines that contain matching output

redirect Redirect output

Begin The begin parameter causes the display to begin at the first line that contains the input

string.

show run | begin vlan1

awplus#

...skipping

interface vlan1

ip address 192.168.14.1

line con 0

line vty 0 4

end

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.6

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Exclude The exclude parameter excludes all lines of output that contain the input string. In the

following output all lines containing the word “input” are excluded:

show interface vlan1 | exclude input

awplus#

Interface vlan1

Scope: both

Hardware is Ethernet, address is 192.168.14.1

index 3 metric 1 mtu 1500 <UP,BROADCAST,RUNNING,MULTICAST>

Label switching is disabled

No Virtual Circuit configured

Administrative Group(s): None

DSTE Bandwidth Constraint Mode is MAM

output packets 4438, bytes 394940, dropped 0

output errors 0, aborted 0, carrier 0, fifo 0, heartbeat 0,

window 0

collisions 0

Include The include parameter includes only those lines of output that contain the input string. In

the output below, all lines containing the word “input” are included:

show interface vlan1 | include input

awplus#

input packets 80434552, bytes 2147483647, dropped 0, multicast

packets 0

input errors 0, length 0, overrun 0, CRC 0, frame 0, fifo 1,

missed 0

Redirect The redirect parameter puts the lines of output into the specified file. If the file already

exists, the new output overwrites the file’s contents; the new output is not appended to

the existing file contents.

| redirect and > are synonyms.

show history | redirect history.txt

awplus#

Output The output redirection token > puts the lines of output into the specified file. If the file

Redirection already exists, the new output overwrites the file’s contents; the new output is not

appended to the existing file contents.

| redirect and > are synonyms.

show history > history.txt

awplus#

Append The append output token >> adds the lines of output into the specified file. The file must

Output already exist, for the new output to be added to the end of the file’s contents; the new

output is appended to the existing file contents.

| append and >> are synonyms.

show history >> history.txt

awplus#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Command List

address-family (BGP and BGP4+)

This command enters the IPv4 or IPv6 Address-Family Configuration command mode. In

this mode you can configure address-family specific parameters. When using VRF-Lite,

you can enter IPv4 Address Family Configuration mode for a specified VRF instance before

configuring that instance.

Syntax [BGP] address-family ipv4 [unicast]

no address-family ipv4 [unicast]

Syntax [VRF] address-family ipv4 [unicast|vrf <vrf-name>]

no address-family ipv4 [unicast|vrf <vrf-name>]

Syntax [BGP4+] address-family ipv6 [unicast]

no address-family ipv6 [unicast]

Parameter

ipv4

Description

Configure parameters relating to the exchange of IPv4 prefixes.

Configure parameters relating to the exchange of IPv6 prefixes.

ipv6

Configure parameters relating to the exchange of routes to unicast

destinations.

unicast

Applies the command to the specified VRF instance.

vrf

The name of the VRF instance to enter IPv4 Address-Family mode for.

<vrf-name>

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration mode for a VRF instance

Mode [BGP4+] Router Configuration

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] To leave the IPv4 or IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode, and return to the Router

Configuration mode, use the exit-address-family (BGP and BGP4+) command.

Example [BGP]

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 100

neighbor 192.168.0.1 remote-as 100

address-family ipv4 vrf green

neighbor 192.168.0.1 activate

exit-address-family

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.8

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Example [BGP4+]

configure terminal

router bgp 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-as

100

awplus(config-router)#

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 activate

exit-address-family

Related Commands exit-address-family (BGP and BGP4+)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

aggregate-address (BGP and BGP4+)

This command adds an aggregate route that can be advertised to BGP or BGP4+

neighbors. This command creates an aggregate entry in the BGP or BGP4+ routing table if

the switch learns, by any means, any routes that are within the range configured by the

aggregate address/mask.

When this command is used with the summary-only option, the more-specific routes of

the aggregate are suppressed to all neighbors. Use the neighbor unsuppress-map (BGP

and BGP4+) command instead to selectively leak more-specific routes to a particular

neighbor.

The no variant of this command removes the aggregate configured by the aggregate-

address command.

Syntax [BGP] aggregate-address <ip-addr/m> {summary-only|as-set}

no aggregate-address <ip-addr/m> {summary-only|as-set}

Syntax [BGP4+] aggregate-address <ipv6-addr/prefix-length> {summary-only|as-set}

no aggregate-address <ipv6-addr/prefix-length> {summary-only|as-set}

Parameter

Description

<ip-addr/m>

Specifies the aggregate IPv4 address and mask.

<ipv6-addr/

prefix-length>

Specifies the aggregate IPv6 address. The IPv6 address uses

the format X:X::X:X/Prefix-Length. The prefix-length is usually

set between 0 and 64.

summary-only

as-set

Filters more specific routes from updates. Only the aggregate

address/mask will be advertised, and none of the component

addresses that fall within the range of the aggregate address/

mask.

Generates AS set path information. The AS-path advertised

with the aggregate is an unordered list of all the AS-numbers

that appear in any of the AS-paths of the component routes,

with each AS-number appearing just once in the list.

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration for a VRF instance

Mode [BGP4+] IPv6 Address Family Configuration

Usage [BGP] If the summary-onlyparameter is specified, then only the aggregate address/mask will

be advertised, and none of the component addresses that fall within the range of the

aggregate address/mask. For example, if you configure:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# router bgp 100

awplus(config-router)# aggregate-address 172.0.0.0/8 summary-only

then the switch will advertise the prefix 172.0.0.0/8, but no component routes like

172.10.0.0/16

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.10

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

The as-setparameter controls the AS-path attribute that is advertised with the

aggregate route. If the switch has learnt multiple routes that are within the range of the

aggregate address/mask, and the AS-paths associated with those routes contain different

sets of AS-numbers, then it is not possible to create a single AS-path that accurately

represents the AS-paths of all those component routes. In this case, the switch will, by

default, advertise a NULL AS-path with the aggregate.

Usage [BGP4+] If the summary-onlyparameter is specified, then only the aggregate address/mask will

be advertised, and none of the component addresses that fall within the range of the

aggregate address/mask. For example, if you configure:

awplus# configure terminal

awplus(config)# router bgp 100

awplus(config-router)#address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router-af)# aggregate-address 2001:0db8::/64

summary-only

then the switch will advertise the prefix 2001:0db8::/64, but no component routes

like 2001:0db8:010d::1/128

Examples [BGP]

configure terminal

router bgp 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

aggregate-address 192.0.0.0/8 as-set

summary-only

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no aggregate-address 192.0.0.0/8 as-set

summary-only

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP4+]

configure terminal

router bgp 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

aggregate-address 2001:0db8::/64

as-set summary-only

configure terminal

router bgp 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no aggregate-address 2001:0db8::/64

as-set summary-only

Related Commands aggregate-address (BGP and BGP4+)

match as-path (Route Map)

auto-summary (BGP)

Use this command to enable sending summarized routes by a BGP speaker to its peers in

the Router Configuration mode or in the Address-Family Configuration mode. BGP uses

auto-summary to advertise summarized routes.

Use the no variant of this command to disable BGP auto-summary.

Syntax auto-summary

no auto-summary

Default The auto-summary function is disabled by default.

Mode Router Configuration and Address Family IPv4 mode

Usage If certain routes have already been advertised, enabling auto-summary results in non-

summarized routes being withdrawn and only summarized routes are advertised.

Summarized routes are advertised before non-summarized routes are withdrawn from all

connected peers.

If certain routes have already been advertised, disabling auto-summary results in

summarized routes being withdrawn and only non-summarized routes are advertised.

Non-summarized routes are advertised before summarized routes are withdrawn from all

connected peers.

Examples The following example enables auto-summary in Router Configuration mode:

configure

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 100

auto-summary

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.12

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

The following example disables auto-summary in Router Configuration mode:

configure terminal

router bgp 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no auto-summary

awplus(config-router)#

The following example enables auto-summary in Address Family IPv4 mode:

configure terminal

router bgp 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv4

auto-summary

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

The following example disables auto-summary in Address Family IPv4 mode:

configure terminal

router bgp 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv4

no auto-summary

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

bgp aggregate-nexthop-check (BGP and BGP4+)

This command affects the operation of the summary-only option on the aggregate-

address command.

This command enables a mode whereby the summary-only option will only suppress the

component routes if those component routes all have the same nexthop. If the routes

have different nexthops, then they will continue to be advertised to peers even if the

summary-only option is configured. By default this is disabled.

The no variant of this command disables this function.

Syntax bgp aggregate-nexthop-check

no bgp aggregate-nexthop-check

Default Disabled by default.

Mode Global Configuration

Example

configure terminal

awplus#

bgp aggregate-nexthop-check

awplus(config)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

bgp always-compare-med (BGP and BGP4+)

This command enables BGP to compare the Multi Exit Discriminator (MED) for paths from

neighbors in different autonomous systems.

Multi Exit Discriminator (MED) is used in best path selection by BGP. MED is compared

after BGP attributes weight, local preference, AS-path and origin have been compared

and are equal.

By default, MED comparison is done only among routes from the same autonomous

system (AS). Use the bgp always-compare-mode command to allow comparison of MEDs

from different ASs.

A path with a lower MED value is preferred. For example, if the bgp table contains the

following entries, and the bgp always-compare-med command has been issued to

enable this feature:

Route1: as-path 400, med 300

Route2: as-path 200, med 200

Route3: as-path 400, med 250

Route1 is compared to Route2. Route2 is best of the two (lower MED). Next, Route2 is

compared to Route3 and Route2 is chosen best path again (lower MED). If always-

compare-med was disabled, MED is not taken into account when Route1 and Route2 are

compared, because of different ASs and MED is compared for only Route1 and Route3. In

this case, Route3 would be the best path. The selected route is also affected by the bgp

deterministic-med command. See the bgp deterministic-med (BGP and BGP4+)

command on page 3.29 for details.

If this command is used to compare MEDs for all paths, it should be configured on every

BGP router in the AS.

The no variant of this command disallows the comparison.

Syntax bgp always-compare-med

no bgp always-compare-med

Default By default this feature is disabled.

Mode Router Configuration

Example

configure terminal

awplus#

router bgp 100

awplus(config)#

bgp always-compare-med

awplus(config-router)#

Related Commands bgp bestpath med (BGP and BGP4+)

bgp bestpath as-path ignore (BGP and BGP4+)

bgp bestpath compare-routerid (BGP and BGP4+)

bgp deterministic-med (BGP and BGP4+)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.14

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

bgp bestpath as-path ignore (BGP and BGP4+)

This command prevents the router from considering as-path as a factor in the algorithm

for choosing a route.

The no variant of this command allows the router to consider as-path in choosing a route.

Syntax bgp bestpath as-path ignore

no bgp bestpath as-path ignore

Mode Router Configuration

Example

configure terminal

router bgp 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

bgp bestpath as-path ignore

awplus(config-router)#

Related Commands bgp always-compare-med (BGP and BGP4+)

bgp bestpath med (BGP and BGP4+)

bgp bestpath compare-routerid (BGP and BGP4+)

bgp bestpath compare-confed-aspath (BGP and

BGP4+)

This command specifies that the AS confederation path length must be used, when

available, in the BGP best path decision process. It is effective only when bgp bestpath as-

path ignore (BGP and BGP4+) command has not been specified.

By default, if BGP receives routes with identical eBGP paths from eBGP peers, BGP does not

continue to consider any AS confederation path length attributes that may be associated

with the routes.

The no variant of this command returns the switch to the default state, where the switch

ignores AS confederation path length in the BGP best path selection process.

Syntax bgp bestpath compare-confed-aspath

no bgp bestpath compare-confed-aspath

Mode Router Configuration

Example

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 100

bgp bestpath compare-confed-aspath

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

bgp bestpath compare-routerid (BGP and BGP4+)

By default, when comparing similar routes from peers, BGP does not consider the router ID

of neighbors advertising the routes - BGP simply selects the first received route. Use this

command to include router ID in the selection process; similar routes are compared and

the route with the lowest router ID is selected.

The no variant of this command disables this feature, and returns the switch to the default

state, where the switch ignores the router ID in the BGP best path selection process.

Syntax bgp bestpath compare-routerid

no bgp bestpath compare-routerid

Mode Router Configuration

Example

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 100

bgp bestpath compare-routerid

awplus(config-router)#

Related Commands show ip bgp (BGP)

bgp bestpath as-path ignore (BGP and BGP4+)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.16

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

bgp bestpath med (BGP and BGP4+)

This command controls how the Multi Exit Discriminator (MED) attribute comparison is

performed.

Use the no variant of this command to prevent BGP from considering the MED attribute

when comparing paths.

Syntax bgp bestpath med {[confed] [missing-as-worst]}

Parameter

Description

Compares MED among confederation paths.

confed

Treats missing MED as the least preferred one.

missing-as-worst

Mode Router Configuration

Usage The confed parameter enables MED comparison among paths learned from

confederation peers. The MED attributes are compared only if there is no external AS

(Autonomous System), where an external AS is one that is not within the confederation. If

there is an external AS in the path, then the MED comparison is not made.

For example, in the following paths the MED value is not compared with Path3since it is

not in the confederation. MED is compared for Path1and Path2only.

Path1 = 32000 32004, med=4

Path2 = 32001 32004, med=2

Path3 = 32003 1, med=1

The effect of the missing-as-worst parameter is to treat a missing MED attribute in a path

as having a value of infinity, making the path without a MED value the least desirable path.

If the missing-as-worst parameter is not configured, the missing MED attribute is

assigned the value of 0, making the path with the missing MED attribute the best path.

Examples

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 100

bgp bestpath med missing-as-worst

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

bgp bestpath med confed

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 100

bgp bestpath med confed missing-as-worst

awplus(config-router)#

Related Commands bgp always-compare-med (BGP and BGP4+)

bgp deterministic-med (BGP and BGP4+)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

bgp bestpath med remove-recv-med (BGP and

BGP4+)

This command removes the Multi Exit Discriminator (MED) attribute from the update

messages received by the BGP speaker from its peers. However, the local BGP speaker will

send MED attributes in the update messages to its peers, unless specified not to by the

bgp bestpath med remove-send-med command.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this feature.

Syntax bgp bestpath med remove-recv-med

no bgp bestpath med remove-recv-med

Mode Router Configuration

Example To enable the remove-recv-med feature on the BGP speaker belonging to the

Autonomous System (AS) 100, enter the command:

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 100

bgp bestpath med remove-recv-med

awplus(config-router)#

bgp bestpath med remove-send-med (BGP and

BGP4+)

This command removes the Multi Exit Discriminator (MED) attribute from the update

messages sent by the BGP speaker to its peers. However, the local BGP speaker will

consider the MED attribute received from other peers during the decision and route

selection process, unless specified not to by the bgp bestpath med remove-recv-med

command.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this feature.

Syntax bgp bestpath med remove-send-med

no bgp bestpath med remove-send-med

Mode Router Configuration

Example To enable the remove-send-med feature on the BGP speaker belonging to the

Autonomous System (AS) 100, enter the command:

configure terminal

awplus#

router bgp 100

awplus(config)#

bgp bestpath med remove-send-med

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.18

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

bgp client-to-client reflection (BGP and BGP4+)

This command restores route reflection from a BGP route reflector to clients, and is used to

configure routers as route reflectors. Route reflectors are used when all Interior Border

Gateway Protocol (iBGP) speakers are not fully meshed.

If the clients are fully meshed the route reflector is not required, use the no variant of this

command to disable the client-to-client route reflection.

When a router is configured as a route reflector, client-to-client reflection is enabled by

default.

The no variant of this command turns off client-to-client reflection.

Syntax bgp client-to-client reflection

no bgp client-to-client reflection

Default This command is enabled by default.

Mode Router Configuration

Example

configure terminal

awplus#

router bgp 100

awplus(config)#

no bgp client-to-client reflection

awplus(config-router)#

Related Commands bgp cluster-id (BGP and BGP4+)

neighbor route-reflector-client (BGP)

neighbor route-reflector-client (BGP)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

bgp cluster-id (BGP and BGP4+)

This command configures the cluster-id if the BGP cluster has more than one route

reflector. A cluster includes one or more route reflectors and their clients. Usually, each

cluster is identified by the router-id of its single route reflector. However, to increase

redundancy, a cluster may sometimes have more than one route reflector. All router

reflectors in such a cluster are then identified by a cluster-id.

The bgp cluster-id command is used to configure the 4 byte cluster ID for clusters with

more than one route reflector.

The no variant of this command removes the cluster ID.

Syntax bgp cluster-id {<ip-address>|<cluster-id>}

no bgp cluster-id

Parameter

Description

<cluster-id> <1-4294967295> Route Reflector cluster-id as a 32 bit

quantity.

<ip-address> A.B.C.D

Route Reflector Cluster-id in IP address

format.

Mode Router Configuration

Usage The following configuration creates cluster-id 5including two route-reflector-

clients.

router bgp 200

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2.2.2.2 remote-as 200

neighbor 3.3.3.3 remote-as 200

neighbor 3.3.3.3 route-reflector-client

neighbor 5.5.5.5 remote-as 200

neighbor 5.5.5.5 route-reflector-client

neighbor 6.6.6.6 remote-as 200

bgp cluster-id 5

Examples To add a bgp cluster-id, apply the example commands as shown below:

configure terminal

router bgp 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

bgp cluster-id 10.10.1.1

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.20

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

To remove a bgp cluster-id apply the example commands as shown below:

configure terminal

router bgp 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no bgp cluster-id 10.10.1.1

awplus(config-router)#

synchronization (BGP and BGP4+)

bgp confederation identifier (BGP and BGP4+)

This command specifies a BGP confederation identifier.

The no variant of this command removes all BGP confederation identifiers.

Syntax bgp confederation identifier <1-4294967295>

no bgp confederation identifier

Parameter

Description

<1-4294967295> Set routing domain confederation AS number.

Mode Router Configuration

Examples

configure terminal

awplus#

router bgp 100

awplus(config)#

bgp confederation identifier 1

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 100

no bgp confederation identifier

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

bgp confederation peers (BGP and BGP4+)

This command configures the Autonomous Systems (AS) that belong to the same

confederation as the current switch.

A confederation allows an AS to be divided into several sub-ASs. The overall AS is given a

confederation identifier. External routers view only the whole confederation as one AS,

whose AS number is the confederation identifier. Each sub-AS is fully meshed within itself

and is visible internally to the confederation.

Use the bgp confederation peer command to define the list of AS numbers of the sub-ASs

in the confederation containing the current switch.

The no variant of this command removes an autonomous system from the confederation.

Syntax bgp confederation peers <1-4294967295>

no bgp confederation peers <1-4294967295>

Parameter

Description

<1-4294967295>

AS numbers of eBGP peers that are under same confederation

but in a different sub-AS.

Mode Router Configuration

Usage In the following configuration of Router 1 the neighbor 172.210.30.2and

172.210.20.1have iBGP connection within AS 100. The neighbor 173.213.30.1

has an BGP connection, but it is within AS 200, which is part of the same confederation.

The neighbor 6.6.6.6has an eBGP connection to external AS 500.

In the configuration of Router 2, neighbor 5.5.5.4has an eBGP connection to

confederation 300. Router2does not know about the ASs 100and 200, it only knows

about confederation 300.

Router 1

router bgp 100

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-router)#

bgp confederation identifier 300

bgp confederation peers 200

neighbor 172.210.30.2 remote-as 100

neighbor 172.210.20.1 remote-as 100

neighbor 173.213.30.1 remote-as 200

neighbor 6.6.6.6 remote-as 300

Router 2

router bgp 500

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 5.5.5.4 remote-as 300

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.22

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Example

configure terminal

router bgp 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

bgp confederation peers 1234

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

bgp config-type (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to set the BGP configuration type to either standard or enhanced

types. When you configure the enhanced type, then BGP and BGP4+ communities are

allowed to be sent and received by default. The enhanced type is configured by default.

Use the no variant of this command to restore the default BGP configuration type

(enhanced).

Syntax bgp config-type {standard|enhanced}

no bgp config-type

Parameter

Description

standard

Specifies the industry standard style configuration. After setting the

configuration to standard, make sure to use the neighbor send-

community (BGP and BGP4+) command to send out BGP

community attributes. The no synchronization command is enabled

in the Global Configuration mode and is shown in the configuration.

enhanced

Specifies the enhanced style configuration. The enhanced

configuration type requires no specific configuration for sending out

BGP standard community and extended community attributes. The

no synchronization command is enabled by default in the Global

Configuration mode and is not shown in configuration output.

Default By default, the BGP configuration type is enhanced.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage Note that the enhanced type default configuration may cause issues in some networks if

unauthorized BGP peers are advertising BGP communities to adjust routing decisions.

Changing modes requires you to reload your device for the change to take effect:

awplus(config)#bgp config-type standard

awplus(config)#exit

awplus#reload

reboot system? (y/n): y

When your device reloads, it will load with the standard BGP settings commonly used by

most vendors. Apply the standard type configuration if you have interoperability issues.

Examples To specify the standardBGP configuration type, enter the following commands:

configure terminal

awplus#

bgp config-type standard

awplus(config)#

To specify the enhancedBGP configuration type, enter the following commands:

configure terminal

awplus#

bgp config-type enhanced

awplus(config)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.24

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

To restore the default BGP configuration type (enhanced), enter the following

commands:

configure terminal

no bgp config-type

awplus#

awplus(config)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

bgp dampening (BGP and BGP4+)

This command enables BGP and BGP4+ dampening and sets BGP and BGP4+ dampening

parameters. BGP4+ dampening is available from the IPv6 Address Family Configuration

mode. BGP dampening is available from the Router Configuration mode.

The no variant of this command disables BGP dampening or unsets the BGP dampening

parameters.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] bgp dampening

no bgp dampening

bgp dampening <reachtime>

no bgp dampening <reachtime>

bgp dampening <reachtime> <reuse> <suppress> <maxsuppress>

no bgp dampening <reachtime> <reuse> <suppress> <maxsuppress>

bgp dampening route-map <routemap-name>

no bgp dampening route-map <routemap-name>

Parameter

Description

<1-45>

Specifies the reachability half-life time in minutes. The time for

the penalty to decrease to one-half of its current value. The

default is 15 minutes.

<reuse>

<1-20000>Specifies the reuse limit value. When the penalty

for a suppressed route decays below the reuse value, the routes

become unsuppressed. The default reuse limit is 750

<1-20000>

Specifies the suppress limit value. When the penalty for a route

exceeds the suppress value, the route is suppressed. The default

suppress limit is 2000.

<1-255>

Specifies the max-suppress-time. Maximum time that a

dampened route is suppressed. The default max-suppress value

is 4 times the half-life time (60 minutes).

<1-45>

Specifies the un-reachability half-life time for penalty, in

minutes.

route-map

Route-map to specify criteria for dampening.

<routemap-name> Specify the name of the route-map.

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration

Mode [BGP4+] IPv6 Address Family Configuration

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.26

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] Route dampening minimizes the instability caused by route flapping. A penalty is added

for every flap in a flapping route. As soon as the total penalty reaches the suppress limit

the advertisement of the route is suppressed. This penalty is decayed according to the

configured half time value. Once the penalty is lower than the reuse limit, the route

advertisement is un-suppressed.

The dampening information is purged from the router once the penalty becomes less

than half of the reuse limit.

Example

[BGP]

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 11

bgp dampening 20 800 2500 80 25

awplus(config-router)#

Example

[BGP4+]

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 11

address-family ipv6

bgp dampening 20 800 2500 80 25

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

bgp default ipv4-unicast (BGP and BGP4+)

This command configures BGP defaults and activates IPv4-unicast for a peer by default.

This affects BGP global configuration. By default, BGP exchanges IPv4 prefixes with a peer.

The no variant of this command disables this function. The BGP routing process will no

longer exchange IPv4 addressing information with BGP neighbor routers. Note that

disabling the exchange of IPv4 prefixes will also enable an IPv6 only BGP4+ network.

Syntax bgp default ipv4-unicast

no bgp default ipv4-unicast

Default This is enabled by default.

Mode Router Configuration

Usage Use the negated form of this command to enable an IPv6 only BGP4+ network.

Examples

configure terminal

router bgp 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

bgp default ipv4-unicast

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no bgp default ipv4-unicast

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

bgp default local-preference (BGP)

This command changes the default local preference value.

The local preference indicates the preferred path when there are multiple paths to the

same destination. The path with the higher preference is preferred.

Use this command to define the default local preference value that the switch will

advertise for the routes it sends. The preference is sent to all routers and access servers in

the local autonomous system.

The no variant of this command reverts to the default local preference value of 100.

Syntax bgp default local-preference <pref-value>

no bgp default local-preference [<pref-value>]

Parameter

Description

<pref-value> <0-4294967295> Configure default local preference value.

The default local preference value is 100.

Default By default the local-preference value is 100.

Mode Router Configuration

Examples

configure terminal

awplus#

router bgp 100

awplus(config)#

bgp default local-preference 2345555

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 100

no bgp default local-preference

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.28

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

bgp deterministic-med (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to allow or disallow the switch to compare the Multi Exit Discriminator

(MED) variable when choosing among routes advertised by different peers in the same

autonomous system (AS).

Use the bgp deterministic-med command to enable this feature to allow the comparison

of MED variables when choosing among routes advertised by different peers in the same

AS.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this feature to disallow the comparison of

the MED variable when choosing among routes advertised by different peers in the same

AS.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] bgp deterministic-med

no bgp deterministic-med

Default [BGP/BGP4+] Disabled

Mode [BGP/BGP4+] Router Configuration

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] When the bgp deterministic-med command is enabled, routes from the same AS are

grouped together and ordered according to their MED values, and the best routes of each

group are compared.

The main benefit of this is that the choice of best route then does not depend on the order

in which the routes happened to be received, which is rather random and arbitrary.

To see how this works, consider the following set of bgp table entries, all for the same

route:

1: ASPATH 234, MED 120, internal, IGP metric to NEXT_HOP 40

2: ASPATH 389, MED 190, internal, IGP metric to NEXT_HOP 35

3: ASPATH 234, MED 245, external

If bgp deterministic-med is not enabled, then entry 3:will be chosen, because it is an

external route.

But if BGP deterministic-MED is enabled, the entries will be grouped as follows:

Group 1: 1: ASPATH 234, MED 120, internal, IGP metric to NEXT_HOP 40

3: ASPATH 234, MED 245, external

Group 2: 2: ASPATH 389, MED 190, internal, IGP metric to NEXT_HOP 35

Note

Routes from the same AS are grouped together and ordered by MED.

Entry 1:is chosen as the best route from Group 1, since this route has the lowest MED

value. Entry 2 has to be the best route in Group 2, since this is the only route in that

group. These two group winners are compared against each other, and Entry 2:is chosen

as the best route because Entry 2:has the lower metric to next-hop.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

All routers in an AS should have the same setting for BGP deterministic-MED. All routers in

an AS should have BGP deterministic-MED enabled with bgp deterministic-med, or all

routers in an AS should have BGP deterministic-MED disabled with no bgp-deterministic-

med.

In the example above, the MED values were not considered when comparing the winners

of the two groups (the best routes from the different ASs). To use MED in the comparison

of routes from different ASs, use the bgp always-compare-med (BGP and BGP4+)

command on page 3.14.

Examples

[BGP/BGP4+]

configure terminal

router bgp 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

bgp deterministic-med

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no bgp deterministic-med

awplus(config-router)#

Related Commands show ip bgp (BGP)

restart bgp graceful (BGP)

bgp enforce-first-as (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to enforce the denying of eBGP updates in which the neighbor's AS

number is not the first AS in the AS-path attribute.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this feature.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] bgp enforce-first-as

no bgp enforce-first-as

Mode [BGP/BGP4+] Router Configuration

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] This command specifies that any updates received from an external neighbor that do not

have the neighbor’s configured Autonomous System (AS) at the beginning of the

AS_PATH in the received update must be denied. Enabling this feature adds to the

security of the BGP network by not allowing traffic from unauthorized systems.

Example

[BGP/BGP4+]

configure terminal

router bgp 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

bgp enforce-first-as

awplus(config-router#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.30

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

bgp fast-external-failover (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to reset a BGP session immediately if the interface used for BGP

connection goes down.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this feature.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] bgp fast-external-failover

no bgp fast-external-failover

Default [BGP/BGP4+] Enabled

Mode [BGP/BGP4+] Router Configuration

Example

[BGP/BGP4+]

configure terminal

router bgp 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

bgp fast-external-failover

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

bgp graceful-restart (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to enable BGP and BGP4+ graceful-restart capabilities for restart and

stalepath times.

Use the no variant of this command to restore restart timers to their default settings.

Syntax bgp graceful-restart

[restart-time <delay-value>|stalepath-time <delay-value>]

no bgp graceful-restart [restart-time|stalepath-time]

Parameter

Description

restart-time

The maximum time needed for neighbors to restart, in

seconds.

The default restart-time is 120 seconds.

stalepath-time

The maximum time to retain stale paths from restarting

neighbors, in seconds. The default stalepath-time is 120

seconds.

<delay-value>

<1-3600>Maximum time in seconds. Default is 120 seconds.

Default The default BGP and BGP4+ graceful restart time is 120 seconds without restart-time or

stalepath-time parameters specified. The default restart-time and stalepath-times are also

120 seconds.

Mode Router Configuration

Usage This command is used to set the maximum time that a graceful-restart neighbor waits to

come back up after a restart. This value is applied to all neighbors unless you explicitly

override it by configuring the corresponding value on the neighbor.

The restart-time parameter is used for setting the maximum time that a graceful-restart

neighbor waits to come back up after a restart. This restart-time value is applied to

neighbors unless you explicitly override it by configuring the corresponding value on the

neighbor.

The stalepath-time parameter is used to set the maximum time to preserve stale paths

from a gracefully restarted neighbor. All stalepaths, unless reinstated by the neighbor

after a re-establishment, will be deleted when time, as specified by the stalepath-time

parameter, expires.

Examples

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

bgp graceful-restart 150

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no bgp graceful-restart

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.32

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

bgp graceful-restart restart-time 150

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no bgp graceful-restart restart-time 150

awplus(config-router)#

bgp graceful-restart graceful-reset (BGP and BGP4+)

This command enables BGP and BGP4+ graceful-restart when a configuration change

forces a peer restart.

Use the no variant of this command to restore the device to its default state.

Syntax bgp graceful-restart graceful-reset

no bgp graceful-restart graceful-reset

Default Disabled

Mode Router Configuration

Usage The bgp graceful-restart (BGP and BGP4+) command on page 3.32 must be enabled

before this command is enabled. All events that cause BGP peer reset, including all session

reset commands, can trigger graceful-restart.

Example To enable the graceful-restart graceful-reset feature on the BGP or BGP4+ peer belonging

to Autonomous System (AS) 10, use the commands:

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

bgp graceful-restart graceful-reset

awplus(config-router)#

To disable the graceful-restart graceful-reset feature on the BGP or BGP4+ peer belonging

to Autonomous System (AS) 10, use the commands:

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no bgp graceful-restart graceful-reset

awplus(config-router)#

Related Commands bgp graceful-restart (BGP and BGP4+)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

bgp log-neighbor-changes (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to enable logging of status change messages without turning on

debug bgp commands.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this feature.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] bgp log-neighbor-changes

no bgp log-neighbor-changes

Default [BGP/BGP4+] Disabled

Mode [BGP/BGP4+] Router Configuration

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] AlliedWare Plus provides other kinds of logging services for neighbor status, for

example, debug bgp fsm, debug bgp events, etc.

However, these commands create a significant hit in the logging performance. If you need

to log neighbor status changes only, we recommend turning off all the debug commands,

and then use this command.

To see BGP neighbor changes in the log you must also set the log level to informational

using the log buffered command.

A sample output of this log is:

%Protocol-Severity-Events: Message-text

A sample output of the log for an interface down event is:

%BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: neighbor 10.10.0.24 Down Interface flap

The bgp log-neighbor-changes command logs the following events:

■

BGP Notification Received

Erroneous BGP Update Received

User reset request

Peer time-out

Peer Closing down the session

Interface flap

Router ID changed

Neighbor deleted

Member added to peer group

Administrative shutdown

Remote AS changed

RR client configuration modification

Soft reconfiguration modification

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.34

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Example To enable the logging of BGP status changes without using the debug bgp command:

[BGP/BGP4+]

configure terminal

router bgp 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

bgp log-neighbor-changes

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

bgp memory maxallocation (BGP and BGP4+)

This command allocates a maximum percentage of the RAM (Random Access Memory)

available on the switch for BGP processes.

When this percentage is exceeded, BGP peering terminates and an out of resources error

displays. The default setting for bgp memory maxallocation is 100% memory allocation.

Use the no variant of this command to reset memory allocation to the default.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] bgp memory maxallocation <1-100>

no bgp memory maxallocation

Parameter

Description

<1-100>

Percentage of switch memory allocated to BGP processes.

Note this is RAM (Random Access Memory), not switch flash

memory.

Default [BGP/BGP4+] BGP processes are allocated the maximum percentage of 100% of the switch’s available

RAM memory by default. Note only non-default BGP memory allocation values are shown

in the running or startup configuration files:

awplus#show running-config

bgp memory maxallocation 50

Mode [BGP/BGP4+] Global Configuration

Examples To limit the maximum amount of memory used by BGP processes to 65% of the total RAM

[BGP/BGP4+]

memory available on the switch, use the commands:

configure terminal

awplus#

bgp memory maxallocation 65

awplus(config)#

To return to the default 100% maximum RAM memory allocation available on the switch

for BGP processes, use the commands:

configure terminal

awplus#

no bgp memory maxallocation

awplus(config)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.36

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

bgp nexthop-trigger-count (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to configure the display of BGP nexthop-tracking status.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this function.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] bgp nexthop-trigger-count <0-127>

no bgp nexthop-trigger-count

Parameter

Description

BGP nexthop-tracking status.

<0-127>

Mode [BGP/BGP4+] Router Configuration

Example To enable nexthop-tracking status on the BGP peer belonging to the Autonomous System

[BGP/BGP4+]

(AS) 100, enter the following commands:

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 100

bgp nexthop-trigger-count 10

awplus(config-router)#

To disable nexthop-tracking status, enter the following commands:

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 100

no bgp nexthop-trigger-count

awplus(config-router)#

bgp nexthop-trigger enable (BGP and BGP4+)

show bgp nexthop-tracking (BGP)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

bgp nexthop-trigger delay (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to set the delay interval for nexthop address tracking.

Use the no variant of this command to reset the timer value to the default.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] bgp nexthop-trigger delay <1-100>

no bgp nexthop-trigger delay

Parameter

Description

<1-100>

Nexthop trigger delay interval in seconds.

Default [BGP/BGP4+] The default nexthop delay interval is 5 seconds.

Mode [BGP/BGP4+] Global Configuration

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] This command configures the delay interval between routing table waits for nexthop

delay tracking. The delay interval determines how long BGP waits after it receives the

trigger from the system about one or more nexthop changes before it walks the full BGP

table to determine which prefixes are affected by the nexthop changes.

Example To set the nexthop delay interval to 6 seconds, enter the command:

configure terminal

awplus#

bgp nexthop-trigger delay 6

awplus(config)#

bgp nexthop-trigger enable (BGP and BGP4+)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.38

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

bgp nexthop-trigger enable (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to enable nexthop address tracking. If nexthop address tracking is

enabled and a nexthop trigger delay interval has not been explicitly set with the bgp

nexthop-trigger delay (BGP and BGP4+) command on page 3.38, the default delay

interval of 5 seconds is used.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this feature.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] bgp nexthop-trigger enable

no bgp nexthop-trigger enable

Default [BGP/BGP4+] Disabled.

Mode [BGP/BGP4+] Global Configuration

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] Nexthop address tracking is an event driven notification system that monitors the status

of routes installed in the Routing Information Base (RIB) and reports nexthop changes that

affect internal BGP (iBGP) or external BGP (eBGP) prefixes directly to the BGP process. This

improves the overall BGP convergence time, by allowing BGP to respond rapidly to

nexthop changes for routes installed in the RIB.

If nexthop tracking is enabled after certain routes are learnt, the registration of all the

nexthops of selected BGP routes are done immediately after the nexthop tracking feature

is enabled.

If nexthop tracking is disabled, and if there are still some selected BGP routes, BGP

deregisters the nexthops of all of the selected BGP routes from the system.

If nexthop tracking is disabled when nexthop tracking is in the process of execution, an

error appears, and nexthop tracking is not disabled. However, if the nexthop tracking

timer is running at the time of negation, the nexthop tracking timer is stopped, and

nexthop tracking is disabled.

Example To enable nexthop address tracking, enter the command:

[BGP/BGP4+]

configure terminal

awplus#

bgp nexthop-trigger enable

awplus(config)#

bgp nexthop-trigger delay (BGP and BGP4+)

show bgp nexthop-tracking (BGP)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

bgp rfc1771-path-select (BGP)

Use this command to set the RFC1771 compatible path selection mechanism.

Use the no variant of this command to revert this setting.

Syntax bgp rfc1771-path-select

no bgp rfc1771-path-select

Default Industry standard compatible path selection mechanism.

Mode Global Configuration

Example

configure terminal

awplus#

bgp rfc1771-path-select

awplus(config)#

bgp rfc1771-strict (BGP)

Use this command to set the Strict RFC1771 setting.

Use the no variant of this command to revert this setting.

Syntax bgp rfc1771-strict

no bgp rfc1771-strict

Default Disabled

Mode Global Configuration

Example

configure terminal

bgp rfc1771-strict

awplus#

awplus(config)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.40

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

bgp router-id (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to configure the router identifier. The IPv4 address specified in this

command does not have to be an IPv4 address that is configured on any of the interfaces

on the switch. Note that you must specify an IPv4 address with this when used for BGP4+.

Use the no variant of this command to return the router-id to its default value (as

described in Default below).

Syntax bgp router-id <routerid>

[BGP/BGP4+]

no bgp router-id [<routerid>]

Parameter

Description

Specify the IPv4 address without mask for a manually configured

router ID, in the format A.B.C.D.

Default If the local loopback interface (lo) is configured the router-id is set to the IP address of this

[BGP/BGP4+]

interface. If not, the highest IP address is the router-id.

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration for a VRF instance

Mode [BGP4+] Router Configuration

Usage Use the bgp router-id command to manually configure a fixed router ID as a BGP or

[BGP/BGP4+]

BGP4+ router identifier. The router-id configured using this command takes precedence

over all other router-id sources

Examples To configure a router ID with an IPv4 address for a BGP or BGP4+ router identifier, enter the

[BGP/BGP4+]

commands listed below:

configure terminal

router bgp 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

bgp router-id 1.1.2.3

awplus(config-router)#

To disable the router ID for a BGP or BGP4+ router identifier enter the commands listed

below:

configure terminal

router bgp 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no bgp router-id

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

bgp scan-time (BGP)

Use this command to set the interval for BGP route next-hop scanning.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this function.

Syntax bgp scan-time <time>

no bgp scan-time [<time>]

Parameter

Description

<time>

<0-60>Scanning interval in seconds.

Default The default scanning interval is 60 seconds.

Mode Router Configuration

Usage Use this command to configure scanning intervals of BGP routers. This interval is the

period after which router checks the validity of the routes in its database.

To disable BGP scanning, set the scan time interval to 0 seconds.

Example

configure terminal

router bgp 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

bgp scan-time 10

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.42

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

bgp update-delay (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to specify the update-delay value for a graceful-restart capable router.

Use the no variant of this command to revert to the default update-delay value.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] bgp update-delay <1-3600>

no bgp update-delay [<1-3600>]

Parameter

Description

<1-3600>

Delay value in seconds.

Default [BGP/BGP4+] The default update-delay value is 120 seconds.

Mode [BGP/BGP4+] Router Configuration

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] The update-delay value is the maximum time a graceful-restart capable router which is

restarting will defer route-selection and advertisements to all its graceful-restart capable

neighbors. This maximum time starts from the instance the first neighbor attains

established state after restart. The restarting router prematurely terminates this timer

when end-of-rib markers are received from all its graceful-restart capable neighbors.

Example

[BGP/BGP4+]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

bgp update-delay 345

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

clear bgp * (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to reset the BGP and BGP4+ connections for all peers.

Syntax clear bgp *

clear bgp * in [prefix-filter]

clear bgp * out

clear bgp * soft [in|out]

Parameter

Description

Clears all BGP and BGP4+ peers.

Indicates that incoming advertised routes will be cleared.

prefix-filter Specifies that a prefix-list will be sent, by the ORF mechanism, to

those neighbors with which the ORF capability has been

negotiated. The neighbors will be triggered to resend updates,

which match the prefix-list filter, to the local router. The local

router will then perform a soft reconfiguration.

out

Indicates that outgoing advertised routes will be cleared.

soft in

Soft inbound reset causes the neighbors to resend all their

updates to the local switch, without resetting the connection or

clearing the entries in the local switch. So, the local switch stores

new updates, and uses them to systematically replace existing

table entries. This process can use a considerable amount of

memory.

soft out

Soft outbound reset causes the switch to simply resend all its

updates to the specified neighbor(s), without resetting the

connection, or clearing table entries.

Mode Privileged Exec

Examples

clear bgp * soft in

awplus#

clear bgp * in prefix-filter

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.44

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

clear bgp (IPv4 or IPv6 address) (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to reset the BGP and BGP4+ connections for specified peers. When

VRF-Lite is configured, you can apply this command to a specific VRF instance. This

command resets all BGP connections from any address family (from either IPv4 or IPv6

Address Families).

Syntax [BGP] clear bgp <ip-addr>

clear bgp <ip-addr> in [prefix-filter]

clear bgp <ip-addr> out

clear bgp <ip-addr> soft [in|out]

Syntax [VRF] clear ip bgp <ip-addr> [vrf <vrf-name>] [in|out|soft [in|out]]

Syntax [BGP4+] clear bgp <ipv6-addr>

clear bgp <ipv6-addr> in [prefix-filter]

clear bgp <ipv6-addr> out

clear bgp <ipv6-addr> soft [in|out]

Parameter

Description

<ip-addr>

Specifies the IPv4 address of the neighbor whose connection is to

be reset, entered in the form A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr>

Specifies the IPv6 address of the neighbor whose connection is to

be reset, entered in hexadecimal in the format X:X::X:X.

Indicates that incoming advertised routes will be cleared.

prefix-filter Specifies that a prefix-list will be sent, by the ORF mechanism, to

those neighbors with which the ORF capability has been

negotiated. The neighbors will be triggered to resend updates,

which match the prefix-list filter, to the local router. The local

router will then perform a soft reconfiguration.

out

Indicates that outgoing advertised routes will be cleared.

soft in

Soft inbound reset causes the neighbors to resend all their

updates to the local switch, without resetting the connection or

clearing the entries in the local switch. So, the local switch stores

new updates, and uses them to systematically replace existing

table entries. This process can use a considerable amount of

memory.

soft out

Soft outbound reset causes the switch to simply resend all its

updates to the specified neighbor(s), without resetting the

connection, or clearing table entries.

Applies the command to the specified VRF instance.

The name of the VRF instance.

vrf

<vrf-name>

Mode [BGP/BGP4+] Privileged Exec

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.45

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP]

clear bgp 3.3.3.3 soft in prefix-filter

clear bgp 2.2.2.2 out

awplus#

To apply the above example to clear the BGP connection to peer at IP address

192.0.2.11for the VRF instance blue, use the following commands:

clear bgp 192.0.2.11 vrf blue in

awplus#

Examples [BGP4+]

clear bgp 2001:0db8:010d::1 soft in prefix-filter

clear bgp 2001:0db8:010d::1 out

awplus#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.46

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

clear bgp (ASN) (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to reset the BGP and BGP4+ connections for peers in the specified

Autonomous System Number (ASN).

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] clear bgp <asn> [in [prefix-filter]|out|soft [in|out]]

Parameter

Description

<asn>

<1-4294967295>

The AS Number for which all routes will be cleared.

Indicates that incoming advertised routes will be cleared.

prefix-filter Specifies that a prefix-list will be sent, by the ORF mechanism, to

those neighbors with which the ORF capability has been

negotiated. The neighbors will be triggered to resend updates,

which match the prefix-list filter, to the local router. The local

router will then perform a soft reconfiguration.

out

Indicates that outgoing advertised routes will be cleared.

soft in

Soft inbound reset causes the neighbors to resend all their

updates to the local switch, without resetting the connection or

clearing the entries in the local switch. So, the local switch stores

new updates, and uses them to systematically replace existing

table entries. This process can use a considerable amount of

memory.

soft out

Soft outbound reset causes the switch to simply resend all its

updates to the specified neighbor(s), without resetting the

connection, or clearing table entries.

Mode [BGP/BGP4+] Privileged Exec

Examples

[BGP/BGP4+]

clear bgp 300 soft in prefix-filter

clear bgp 500 soft out

awplus#

clear bgp 300 soft in

clear bgp 1 in prefix-filter

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.47

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

clear bgp external (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to reset the BGP and BGP4+ connections for all external peers.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] clear bgp external [in [prefix-filter]|out|soft [in|out]]

Parameter

Description

external

Clears all external peers.

Indicates that incoming advertised routes will be cleared.

prefix-filter Specifies that a prefix-list will be sent, by the ORF mechanism, to

those neighbors with which the ORF capability has been

negotiated. The neighbors will be triggered to resend updates,

which match the prefix-list filter, to the local router. The local

router will then perform a soft reconfiguration.

out

Indicates that outgoing advertised routes will be cleared.

soft in

Soft inbound reset causes the neighbors to resend all their

updates to the local switch, without resetting the connection or

clearing the entries in the local switch. So, the local switch stores

new updates, and uses them to systematically replace existing

table entries. This process can use a considerable amount of

memory.

soft out

Soft outbound reset causes the switch to simply resend all its

updates to the specified neighbor(s), without resetting the

connection, or clearing table entries.

Mode [BGP/BGP4+] Privileged Exec

Examples

[BGP/BGP4+]

clear bgp external soft in

awplus#

clear bgp external in prefix-filter

awplus#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.48

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

clear bgp peer-group (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to reset the BGP and BGP4+ connections for all members of a peer

group.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] clear bgp peer-group <peer-group>

[in [prefix-filter]|out|soft [in|out]]

Parameter

Description

peer-group

Clears all members of a peer group.

<peer-group>

Name of the BGP peer group

Indicates that incoming advertised routes will be cleared.

prefix-filter Specifies that a prefix-list will be sent, by the ORF mechanism, to

those neighbors with which the ORF capability has been

negotiated. The neighbors will be triggered to resend updates,

which match the prefix-list filter, to the local router. The local

router will then perform a soft reconfiguration.

out

Indicates that outgoing advertised routes will be cleared.

soft in

Soft inbound reset causes the neighbors to resend all their

updates to the local switch, without resetting the connection or

clearing the entries in the local switch. So, the local switch stores

new updates, and uses them to systematically replace existing

table entries. This process can use a considerable amount of

memory.

soft out

Soft outbound reset causes the switch to simply resend all its

updates to the specified neighbor(s), without resetting the

connection, or clearing table entries.

Mode [BGP/BGP4+] Privileged Exec

Examples

[BGP/BGP4+]

clear bgp peer-group P1 soft in

clear bgp peer-group P2 in

awplus#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.49

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

clear ip bgp * (BGP)

Use this command to reset all BGP connections, either by fully resetting sessions or by

performing soft resets. If VRF-Lite is configured, you can reset BGP connections for all VRF

instances or for a specified VRF instance.

Syntax clear ip bgp *

clear ip bgp * in

clear ip bgp * out

clear ip bgp * soft [in|out]

clear ip bgp * in [prefix-filter]

Syntax [VRF] clear ip bgp * [vrf <vrf-name>]

clear ip bgp * [vrf <vrf-name>] in

clear ip bgp * [vrf <vrf-name>] out

clear ip bgp * [vrf <vrf-name>] soft [in|out]

clear ip bgp * in [prefix-filter]

Parameter

Description

Clears all bgp peers.

Indicates that incoming advertised routes will be cleared.

prefix-filter Specifies that a prefix-list will be sent, by the ORF mechanism, to

those neighbors with which the ORF capability has been

negotiated. The neighbors will be triggered to resend updates,

which match the prefix-list filter, to the local router. The local

router will then perform a soft reconfiguration.

out

Indicates that outgoing advertised routes will be cleared.

soft in

Soft inbound reset causes the neighbors to resend all their

updates to the local switch, without resetting the connection or

clearing the entries in the local switch. So, the local switch stores

new updates, and uses them to systematically replace existing

table entries. This process can use a considerable amount of

memory.

soft out

Soft outbound reset causes the switch to simply resend all its

updates to the specified neighbor(s), without resetting the

connection, or clearing table entries.

Applies the command to the specified VRF instance.

The name of the VRF instance.

vrf

<vrf-name>

Mode Privileged Exec

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.50

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples To clear all BGP peers, use the command:

clear ip bgp *

awplus#

To clear all BGP peers in VRF instance red, use the command:

clear ip bgp * vrf red

awplus#

To clear all outbound BGP peers in VRF instance red, use the command:

clear ip bgp * out vrf red

awplus#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.51

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

clear ip bgp (IPv4) (BGP)

Use this command to reset the IPv4 BGP connection to the peer specified by the IP

address. When VRF-Lite is configured, you can apply this command to a specific VRF

instance.

Syntax [BGP] clear ip bgp <ipv4-addr> [in [prefix-filter]|out|soft [in|out]]

Syntax [VRF] clear ip bgp <ipv4-address> [vrf <vrf-name>] [in|out|soft [in|out]]

Parameter

Description

<ipv4-addr>

Specifies the IPv4 address of the neighbor whose connection is to

be reset, entered in the form A.B.C.D.

Indicates that incoming advertised routes will be cleared.

prefix-filter Specifies that a prefix-list will be sent, by the ORF mechanism, to

those neighbors with which the ORF capability has been

negotiated. The neighbors will be triggered to resend updates,

which match the prefix-list filter, to the local router. The local

router will then perform a soft reconfiguration.

out

Indicates that outgoing advertised routes will be cleared.

soft in

Soft inbound reset causes the neighbors to resend all their

updates to the local switch, without resetting the connection or

clearing the entries in the local switch. So, the local switch stores

new updates, and uses them to systematically replace existing

table entries. This process can use a considerable amount of

memory.

soft out

Soft outbound reset causes the switch to simply resend all its

updates to the specified neighbor(s), without resetting the

connection, or clearing table entries.

Applies the command to the specified VRF instance.

The name of the VRF instance.

vrf

<vrf-name>

Mode [BGP] Privileged Exec

Examples [BGP] Use the following command to clear the BGP connection to peer at IPv4 address

192.168.1.1, and clearing all incoming routes.

clear ip bgp 192.168.1.1 in

awplus#

To apply the above example to clear the BGP connection to peer at IP address

192.0.2.11for the VRF instance blue, use the following commands:

clear ip bgp 192.0.2.11 vrf blue in

awplus#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.52

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

clear ip bgp dampening (BGP)

Use this command to clear route dampening information and unsuppress routes that

have been suppressed.

Syntax clear ip bgp dampening [<ip-address>|<ip-address/m>]

Parameter

Description

<ip-address>

Specifies the IPv4 address for which BGP dampening is to be

cleared, in dotted decimal format.

<ip-address/m>

Specifies the IPv4 address with mask for which BGP dampening

is to be cleared, entered in the form A.B.C.D/M. Where M is the

subnet mask

ipv4

Clears all IPv4 address family peers. Configure parameters

relating to the BGP exchange of IPv4 prefixes.

Mode Privileged Exec

Examples

clear ip bgp dampening 10.10.0.121

awplus#

clear ip bgp flap-statistics (BGP)

Use this command to clear the flap count and history duration for the specified prefixes.

Syntax clear ip bgp flap-statistics [<ip-address>|<ip-address/m>]

Parameter

Description

<ip-address>

Specifies the IPv4 address for which BGP flap count and history

duration are to be cleared.

<ip-address/m> Specifies the IPv4 address with mask for which BGP flap count

and history duration are to be cleared.

ipv4

Clears all IPv4 address family peers. Configure parameters relating

to the BGP exchange of IPv4 prefixes.

Mode Privileged Exec

Examples

clear ip bgp flap-statistics 10.10.0.121

awplus#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.53

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

clear ip bgp (ASN) (BGP)

Use this command to reset the BGP connections to all peers in a specified Autonomous

System Number (ASN).

Syntax clear ip bgp <asn> [in [prefix-filter]|out|soft [in|out]]

clear ip bgp <asn> ipv4

clear ip bgp <asn> ipv4 in [prefix-filter]

clear ip bgp <asn> ipv4 out

clear ip bgp <asn> ipv4 soft [in|out]

Parameter

Description

<asn>

<1-4294967295>

Specifies the ASN for which all routes will be cleared.

ipv4

Clears all IPv4 address family peers. Configure parameters relating

to the BGP exchange of IPv4 prefixes.

Indicates that incoming advertised routes will be cleared.

prefix-filter Specifies that a prefix-list will be sent, by the ORF mechanism, to

those neighbors with which the ORF capability has been

negotiated. The neighbors will be triggered to resend updates,

which match the prefix-list filter, to the local router. The local router

will then perform a soft reconfiguration.

out

Indicates that outgoing advertised routes will be cleared.

soft in

Soft inbound reset causes the neighbors to resend all their updates

to the local switch, without resetting the connection or clearing

the entries in the local switch. So, the local switch stores new

updates, and uses them to systematically replace existing table

entries. This process can use a considerable amount of memory.

soft out

Soft outbound reset causes the switch to simply resend all its

updates to the specified neighbor(s), without resetting the

connection, or clearing table entries.

Mode Privileged Exec

Examples

clear ip bgp 100

awplus#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.54

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

clear ip bgp external (BGP)

Use this command to reset the BGP connections to all external peers.

Syntax clear ip bgp external [in [prefix-filter]|out|soft [in|out]]

clear ip bgp external

clear ip bgp external in [prefix-filter]

clear ip bgp external out

clear ip bgp external soft [in|out]

Parameter

Description

external

Clears all external peers.

ipv4

Clears all IPv4 address family peers. Configure parameters relating

to the BGP exchange of IPv4 prefixes.

Indicates that incoming advertised routes will be cleared.

prefix-filter Specifies that a prefix-list will be sent, by the ORF mechanism, to

those neighbors with which the ORF capability has been

negotiated. The neighbors will be triggered to resend updates,

which match the prefix-list filter, to the local router. The local

router will then perform a soft reconfiguration.

out

Indicates that outgoing advertised routes will be cleared.

soft in

Soft inbound reset causes the neighbors to resend all their

updates to the local switch, without resetting the connection or

clearing the entries in the local switch. So, the local switch stores

new updates, and uses them to systematically replace existing

table entries. This process can use a considerable amount of

memory.

soft out

Soft outbound reset causes the switch to simply resend all its

updates to the specified neighbor(s), without resetting the

connection, or clearing table entries.

Mode Privileged Exec

Examples

clear ip bgp external out

awplus#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.55

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

clear ip bgp peer-group (BGP)

Use this command to reset the BGP connections to all members of a peer group.

Syntax clear ip bgp peer-group <peer-name>

clear ip bgp peer-group <peer-name> in [prefix-filter]

clear ip bgp peer-group <peer-name> out

clear ip bgp peer-group <peer-name> soft [in|out]

clear ip bgp peer-group <peer-name> out

clear ip bgp peer-group <peer-name> soft [in|out]

Parameter

Description

peer-group

Clears all members of a peer group.

<peer-name>

Specifies the name of the peer group for which all members will be

cleared.

ipv4

Clears all IPv4 address family peers. Configure parameters relating

to the BGP exchange of IPv4 prefixes.

Indicates that incoming advertised routes will be cleared.

prefix-filter Specifies that a prefix-list will be sent, by the ORF mechanism, to

those neighbors with which the ORF capability has been

negotiated. The neighbors will be triggered to resend updates,

which match the prefix-list filter, to the local router. The local router

will then perform a soft reconfiguration.

out

Indicates that outgoing advertised routes will be cleared.

soft in

Soft inbound reset causes the neighbors to resend all their updates

to the local switch, without resetting the connection or clearing

the entries in the local switch. So, the local switch stores new

updates, and uses them to systematically replace existing table

entries. This process can use a considerable amount of memory.

soft out

Soft outbound reset causes the switch to simply resend all its

updates to the specified neighbor(s), without resetting the

connection, or clearing table entries.

Mode Privileged Exec

Examples

clear ip bgp peer-group Peer1 out

awplus#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.56

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

clear bgp ipv6 (ipv6 address) (BGP4+)

Use this command to reset the IPv6 BGP4+ connection to the peer specified by the IP

address.

Syntax clear bgp ipv6 <ipv6-addr> [in [prefix-filter]|out|soft [in|out]]

Parameter

Description

<ipv6-addr>

Specifies the IPv6 address of the neighbor whose connection is to

be reset, entered in hexadecimal in the format X:X::X:X.

ipv6

Clears all IPv6 address family peers. Configure parameters relating

to the BGP4+ exchange of IPv6 prefixes.

Indicates that incoming advertised routes will be cleared.

prefix-filter Specifies that a prefix-list will be sent, by the ORF mechanism, to

those neighbors with which the ORF capability has been

negotiated. The neighbors will be triggered to resend updates,

which match the prefix-list filter, to the local router. The local

router will then perform a soft reconfiguration.

out

Indicates that outgoing advertised routes will be cleared.

soft in

Soft inbound reset causes the neighbors to resend all their

updates to the local switch, without resetting the connection or

clearing the entries in the local switch. So, the local switch stores

new updates, and uses them to systematically replace existing

table entries. This process can use a considerable amount of

memory.

soft out

Soft outbound reset causes the switch to simply resend all its

updates to the specified neighbor(s), without resetting the

connection, or clearing table entries.

Mode Privileged Exec

Examples Use the following command to clear the BGP4+ connection to peer at IPv6 address

2001:0db8:010d::1, and clearing all incoming routes.

clear ip bgp 2001:0db8:010d::1 in

awplus#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.57

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

clear bgp ipv6 dampening (BGP4+)

Use this command to clear route dampening information and unsuppress routes that

have been suppressed routes.

Syntax clear bgp ipv6 dampening [<ipv6-addr>|<ipv6-addr/prefix-length>]

Parameter

Description

<ipv6-addr>

Specifies the IPv6 address for which BGP4+ dampening is to

be cleared, entered in hexadecimal in the format X:X::X:X.

<ipv6-addr/

prefix-length>

Specifies the IPv6 address and prefix-length for which BGP4+

dampening is to be cleared. The IPv6 address uses the format

X:X::X:X/Prefix-Length. The prefix-length is usually set

between 0 and 64.

Mode Privileged Exec

Examples

clear bgp ipv6 dampening 2001:0db8:010d::1

awplus#

clear bgp ipv6 dampening 2001:0db8::/64

awplus#

clear bgp ipv6 flap-statistics (BGP4+)

Use this command to clear the flap count and history duration for the specified prefixes.

Syntax clear bgp ipv6 flap-statistics

[<ipv6-addr>|<ipv6-addr/prefix-length>]

Parameter

Description

<ipv6-addr>

Specifies the IPv6 address for which BGP4+ flap count and

history duration are to be cleared, entered in hexadecimal in

the format X:X::X:X.

<ipv6-addr/

prefix-length>

Specifies the IPv6 address with with prefix length for which

BGP4+ flap count and history duration are to be cleared. The

IPv6 address uses the format X:X::X:X/Prefix-Length. The

prefix-length is usually set between 0 and 64.

Mode Privileged Exec

Examples

clear bgp ipv6 flap-statistics 2001:0db8:010d::1

awplus#

clear bgp ipv6 flap-statistics 2001:0db8::/64

awplus#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.58

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

clear bgp ipv6 (ASN) (BGP4+)

Use this command to reset the BGP4+ connections to all peers in a specified Autonomous

System Number (ASN).

Syntax clear bgp ipv6 <asn> [in [prefix-filter]|out|soft [in|out]]

clear bgp ipv6 <asn>

clear bgp ipv6 <asn> in [prefix-filter]

clear bgp ipv6 <asn> out

clear bgp ipv6 <asn> soft [in|out]

Parameter

Description

<asn>

<1-4294967295>

Specifies the ASN for which all routes will be cleared.

Indicates that incoming advertised routes will be cleared.

prefix-filter Specifies that a prefix-list will be sent, by the ORF mechanism, to

those neighbors with which the ORF capability has been

negotiated. The neighbors will be triggered to resend updates,

which match the prefix-list filter, to the local router. The local router

will then perform a soft reconfiguration.

out

Indicates that outgoing advertised routes will be cleared.

soft in

Soft inbound reset causes the neighbors to resend all their updates

to the local switch, without resetting the connection or clearing

the entries in the local switch. So, the local switch stores new

updates, and uses them to systematically replace existing table

entries. This process can use a considerable amount of memory.

soft out

Soft outbound reset causes the switch to simply resend all its

updates to the specified neighbor(s), without resetting the

connection, or clearing table entries.

Mode Privileged Exec

Examples

clear bgp ipv6 100

awplus#

clear bgp ipv6 100 in

clear bgp ipv6 100 in prefix-filter

clear bgp ipv6 100 out

clear bgp ipv6 100 soft out

clear bgp ipv6 100 soft in

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.59

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

clear bgp ipv6 external (BGP4+)

Use this command to reset the BGP4+ connections to all external peers.

Syntax clear bgp ipv6 external [in [prefix-filter]|out|soft [in|out]]

clear bgp ipv6 external

clear bgp ipv6 external in [prefix-filter]

clear bgp ipv6 external out

clear bgp ipv6 external soft [in|out]

Parameter

Description

external

Clears all external peers.

Indicates that incoming advertised routes will be cleared.

prefix-filter Specifies that a prefix-list will be sent, by the ORF mechanism, to

those neighbors with which the ORF capability has been

negotiated. The neighbors will be triggered to resend updates,

which match the prefix-list filter, to the local router. The local

router will then perform a soft reconfiguration.

out

Indicates that outgoing advertised routes will be cleared.

soft in

Soft inbound reset causes the neighbors to resend all their

updates to the local switch, without resetting the connection or

clearing the entries in the local switch. So, the local switch stores

new updates, and uses them to systematically replace existing

table entries. This process can use a considerable amount of

memory.

soft out

Soft outbound reset causes the switch to simply resend all its

updates to the specified neighbor(s), without resetting the

connection, or clearing table entries.

Mode Privileged Exec

Examples

clear bgp ipv6 external in

awplus#

clear bgp ipv6 external in prefix

clear bgp ipv6 external out

clear bgp ipv6 external soft out

clear bgp ipv6 external soft in

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.60

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

clear bgp ipv6 peer-group (BGP4+)

Use this command to reset the BGP4+ connections to all members of a peer group.

Syntax clear bgp ipv6 peer-group <peer-name>

clear bgp ipv6 peer-group <peer-name> in [prefix-filter]

clear bgp ipv6 peer-group <peer-name> out

clear bgp ipv6 peer-group <peer-name> soft [in|out]

clear bgp ipv6 peer-group <peer-name>

clear bgp ipv6 peer-group <peer-name> in [prefix-filter]

clear bgp ipv6 peer-group <peer-name> out

clear bgp ipv6 peer-group <peer-name> soft [in|out]

Parameter

Description

peer-group

Clears all members of a peer group.

<peer-name>

Specifies the name of the peer group for which all members will be

cleared.

ipv6

Clears all IPv6 address family peers. Configure parameters relating

to the BGP4+ exchange of IPv6 prefixes.

Indicates that incoming advertised routes will be cleared.

prefix-filter Specifies that a prefix-list will be sent, by the ORF mechanism, to

those neighbors with which the ORF capability has been

negotiated. The neighbors will be triggered to resend updates,

which match the prefix-list filter, to the local router. The local router

will then perform a soft reconfiguration.

out

Indicates that outgoing advertised routes will be cleared.

soft in

Soft inbound reset causes the neighbors to resend all their updates

to the local switch, without resetting the connection or clearing

the entries in the local switch. So, the local switch stores new

updates, and uses them to systematically replace existing table

entries. This process can use a considerable amount of memory.

soft out

Soft outbound reset causes the switch to simply resend all its

updates to the specified neighbor(s), without resetting the

connection, or clearing table entries.

Mode Privileged Exec

Example

clear bgp ipv6 peer-group Peer1 out

awplus#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.61

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

debug bgp (BGP)

Use this command to turn on one or more BGP debug options.

Use the no variant of this command to disable one or more BGP debug options.

updates [in|out]]

no debug all bgp

updates [in|out]]

Parameter

Description

all

Turns on all debugging for BGP.

dampening

events

filters

fsm

Specifies debugging for BGP dampening.

Specifies debugging for BGP events.

Specifies debugging for BGP filters.

Specifies debugging for BGP Finite State Machine (FSM).

Specifies debugging for BGP keepalives.

keepalives

nht

Specifies debugging for BGP NHT (Next Hop Tracking) messages.

Specifies debugging for NSM messages.

nsm

updates

[in|out]

Specifies debugging for BGP updates.

Inbound updates.

out

Outbound updates.

Mode Privileged Exec and Global Configuration

Usage If the command is entered with no parameters, then all debug options are enabled.

Examples

debug bgp

awplus#

debug bgp events

debug bgp nht

debug bgp updates in

Related Commands show debugging bgp (BGP)

undebug bgp (BGP)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.62

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

distance (BGP and BGP4+)

This command sets the administrative distance for BGP and BGP4+ routes. The switch uses

this value to select between two or more routes to the same destination from two

different routing protocols. Set the administrative distance for BGP routes in the Router

Configuration mode, and for BGP4+ routes in IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode.

The route with the smallest administrative distance value is added to the Forwarding

Information Base (FIB). For more information, see the Administrative Distance section in

the Route Selection chapter of the AlliedWare Plus Software Reference.

The no variant of this command sets the administrative distance for the route to the

default for the route type.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] distance <1-255> <ip-address/m> [<listname>]

distance bgp <ebgp> <ibgp> <local>

no distance <1-255> <ip-address/m> [<listname>]

no distance bgp <ebgp> <ibgp> <local>

Parameter

Description

<1-255>

The administrative distance value you are setting for the route.

<ip-address/m> The IP source prefix that you are changing the administrative

distance for, entered in the form A.B.C.D/M. This is an IPv4

address in dotted decimal notation followed by a forward slash,

and then the prefix length.

The name of the access list to be applied to the administrative

distance to selected routes.

<ebgp>

Specifies the administrative distance of external BGP (eBGP)

routes. These are routes learnt from a neighbor out of the AS.

Specify the distance as a number between 1 and 255.

Default: 20

<ibgp>

Specifies the administrative distance of internal BGP (iBGP)

routes. These are routes learnt from a neighbor within the same

AS. Specify the distance as a number between 1 and 255.

Default: 200

<local>

Specifies the administrative distance of local BGP routes. These

are routes redistributed from another protocol within your

device. Specify the distance as a number between 1 and 255.

Default: 200

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration

Mode [BGP4+] IPv6 Address Family Configuration

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.63

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Usage You can use this command to set the administrative distance:

■

for each BGP route types by specifying:

distance (BGP and BGP4+) <ebgp> <igbp> <local>

■

for a specific route by specifying:

distance (BGP and BGP4+) <1-255> <ip-address/m> [<listname>]

If the administrative distance is changed, it could create inconsistency in the routing table

and obstruct routing.

Examples For BGP IPv4, to set the administrative distance to 34 for the route 10.10.0.0/24 in BGP 100,

[BGP]

and use the access list “mylist” to filter the routes, use the commands:

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 100

distance 34 10.10.0.0/24 mylist

awplus(config-router)#

For BGP IPv4, to set BGP 100’s administrative distances for eBGP routes to 34, iBGP routes

to 23, and local BGP routes to 15, use the commands:

configure terminal

router bgp 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

distance bgp 34 23 15

awplus(config-router)#

Example For BGP4+ IPv6, to set BGP 100’s administrative distances for eBGP routes to 34, iBGP

[BGP4+]

routes to 23, and local BGP routes to 15, use the commands:

configure terminal

router bgp 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

distance bgp 34 23 15

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.64

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

exit-address-family (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to exit either the IPv4 or the IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] exit-address-family

Mode [BGP] IPv4 Address Family Configuration

Mode [BGP4+] IPv6 Address Family Configuration

Examples [BGP] To enter and then exit IPv4 Address Family Configuration mode, use the commands:.

configure terminal

router bgp 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv4

exit-address-family

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

awplus(config-router)#

To enter and then exit IPv4 Address Family Configuration mode for VRF instance red, use

the commands:.

configure terminal

router bgp 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv4 vrf red

exit-address-family

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

awplus(config-router)#

Example [BGP4+] To enter and then exit IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode, use the commands:.

configure terminal

router bgp 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

exit-address-family

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

awplus(config-router)#

Related Commands address-family (BGP and BGP4+)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.65

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

ip as-path access-list (BGP and BGP4+)

This command defines a BGP and BGP4+ Autonomous System (AS) path access list.

The named AS path list is a filter based on regular expressions. If the regular expression

matches the AS path in a BGP update message, then the permit or deny condition applies

to that update. Use this command to define the BGP access list globally, then use

neighbor configuration commands to apply the list to a particular neighbor.

The no variant of this command disables the use of the access list

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] ip as-path access-list <listname> {deny|permit} <reg-exp>

no ip as-path access-list <listname> {deny|permit} <reg-exp>

Parameter

Description

Specifies the name of the access list.

deny

Denies access to matching conditions.

permit

<reg-exp>

Permits access to matching conditions.

Specifies a regular expression to match the BGP AS paths.

Regular expressions listed below can be used with the ip as-path-access-list command:

Symbol

Character Meaning

Caret

Used to match the beginning of the input string. When used at

the beginning of a string of characters, it negates a pattern

match.

Dollar sign Used to match the end of the input string.

Period

Used to match a single character (white spaces included).

Asterisk

Plus sign

Used to match none or more sequences of a pattern.

Used to match one or more sequences of a pattern.

Used to match none or one occurrence of a pattern.

Question

mark

Underscor Used to match spaces, commas, braces, parenthesis, or the

beginning and end of an input string.

Specifies a range of single-characters.

Separates the end points of a range.

[ ]

Brackets

Hyphen

Mode [BGP/BGP4+] Global Configuration

Example

[BGP/BGP4+]

configure terminal

awplus#

ip as-path access-list mylist deny ^65535$

awplus(config)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.66

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

ip community-list (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to add an entry to a standard or extended BGP community-list filter.

Use the no variant of this command to delete a standard or extended community list

entry.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] ip community-list <listname> {deny|permit} .<community>

no ip community-list <listname> {deny|permit} .<community>

Parameter

Description

Specifies the community listname.

deny

Specifies the community to reject.

Specifies the community to accept.

permit

.<community> {<AS:VAL>|local-AS|no-advertise|no-export}

<AS:VAL>

local-AS

Specifies the valid value for the community number. This format

represents the 32 bit communities value, where AS is the high order

16 bits and VAL is the low order 16 bits in digit format.

Specifies routes not to be advertised to external BGP peers.

no-advertise Specifies routes not to be advertised to other BGP peers.

no-export

Specifies routes not to be advertised outside of Autonomous System

boundary.

Mode [BGP/BGP4+] Global Configuration

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] A community-list can be used as a filter to BGP updates. Use this command to define the

community access list globally, then use neighbor configuration commands to apply the

list to a particular neighbor.

There are two kinds of community-lists: expanded and standard. A standard community-

list defines the community attributes explicitly and not via a regular expression. An

expanded community-list defines the communities attributes with regular expressions.

The standard community-list is compiled into binary format and is directly compared with

the BGP communities attribute in the BGP updates. The comparison is faster than the

expanded community-list. Any community value that does not match the standard

community value is automatically treated as expanded.

Example

[BGP/BGP4+]

configure terminal

awplus#

ip community-list mylist permit 7675:80 7675:90

awplus(config)#

ip community-list expanded (BGP and BGP4+)

show ip community-list (BGP and BGP4+)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.67

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

ip community-list expanded (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to add an entry to an expanded BGP community-list filter.

Use the no variant of this command to delete the community list entry.

Syntax ip community-list <100-199> {deny|permit} .<line>

no ip community-list <100-199> {deny|permit} .<line>

ip community-list expanded <expanded-listname> {deny|permit} .<line>

no ip community-list expanded <expanded-listname> {deny|permit}

.<line>

Parameter

Description

<100-199>

Expanded community list number.

expanded

Specifies an expanded community list.

<expanded-listname> Expanded community list entry.

deny

Specifies community to reject.

permit

.<line>

Specifies community to accept.

Specifies community attributes with regular expressions.

Regular expressions listed below can be used with the ip community-list expanded

command:

Symbo

Character Meaning

Caret Used to match the beginning of the input string. When used at the

beginning of a string of characters, it negates a pattern match.

Dollar sign Used to match the end of the input string.

Period

Used to match a single character (white spaces included).

Used to match none or more sequences of a pattern.

Used to match one or more sequences of a pattern.

Used to match none or one occurrence of a pattern.

Asterisk

Plus sign

Question

mark

Underscor Used to match spaces, commas, braces, parenthesis, or the

beginning and end of an input string.

Specifies a range of single-characters.

Separates the end points of a range.

[ ]

Brackets

Hyphen

Mode Global Configuration

Usage A community-listcan be used as a filter to BGP updates. Use this command to define

the community access list globally, then use neighborconfiguration commands to

apply the list to a particular neighbor.

There are two kinds of community-lists: expanded and standard. A standard community-

list defines the community attributes explicitly and not via a regular expression. An

expanded community-list defines the communities attributes with regular expressions.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.68

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

The standard community-list is compiled into binary format and is directly compared with

the BGP communities attribute in the BGP updates. The comparison is faster than the

expanded community-list. Any community value that does not match the standard

community value is automatically treated as expanded.

Examples

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

ip community-list 125 permit 6789906

ip community-list expanded CLIST permit .*

Related Commands ip community-list (BGP and BGP4+)

ip community-list standard (BGP and BGP4+)

show ip community-list (BGP and BGP4+)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.69

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

ip community-list standard (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to add an entry to a standard BGP community-list filter.

Use the no variant of this command to delete the standard community-list entry.

Syntax ip community-list <1-99> {deny|permit} [.<community>]

no ip community-list <1-99> {deny|permit} [.<community>]

ip community-list standard <standard-listname> {deny|permit}

[.<community>]

no ip community-list standard <standard-listname> {deny|permit}

[.<community>]

Parameter

Description

<1-99>

Standard community list number.

standard

Specifies a standard community list.

<standard-listname> Standard community list entry.

deny

Specifies community to reject.

permit

Specifies community to accept.

<AS:VAL>

{<AS:VAL>|local-AS|no-advertise|no-export}

Specifies the valid value for the community number. This

format represents the 32 bit communities value, where

ASis the high order 16 bits and VALis the low order 16

bits in digit format.

local-AS

Specifies routes not to be advertised to external BGP

peers.

no-advertise

no-export

Specifies routes not to be advertised to other BGP peers.

Specifies routes not to be advertised outside of the

Autonomous System boundary.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage A community-list can be used as a filter to BGP updates. Use this command to define the

community access list globally, then use neighbor configuration commands to apply the

list to a particular neighbor.

There are two kinds of community-lists: expanded and standard. The standard

community-list defines the community attributes as explicit values, without regular

expressions. The expanded community-list defines the communities attributes with

regular expressions.

The standard community-list is compiled into binary format and is directly compared with

the BGP communities attribute in the BGP updates. The comparison is faster than the

expanded community-list. Any community value that does not match the standard

community value is automatically treated as expanded.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.70

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples

configure terminal

awplus#

ip community-list standard CLIST permit 7675:80

7675:90 no-export

awplus(config)#

ip community-list 34 permit 5675:50 no-

advertise

awplus(config)#

Related Commands ip community-list (BGP and BGP4+)

ip community-list expanded (BGP and BGP4+)

show ip community-list (BGP and BGP4+)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.71

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

ip extcommunity-list expanded (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to create or delete an expanded extended community list.

Use the no variant of this command to delete the expanded extended community-list

entry.

Syntax ip extcommunity-list <100-199> {deny|permit}

{.<line>|.<AS:NN>|.<ip-address>}

no ip extcommunity-list <100-199> {deny|permit}

{.<line>|.<AS:NN>|.<ip-address>}

ip extcommunity-list expanded <expanded-listname> {deny|permit}

{.<line>|.<AS:NN>|.<ip-address>}

no ip extcommunity-list expanded <expanded-listname> {deny|permit}

{.<line>|.<AS:NN>|.<ip-address>}

no ip extcommunity-list <100-199>

no ip extcommunity-list expanded <expanded-listname>

Parameter

Description

<100-199>

Expanded extcommunity list number.

expanded

Specifies an expanded extcommunity list.

<expanded-listname> Expanded extcommunity list entry.

deny

Specifies the extcommunity to reject.

Specifies the extcommunity to accept.

permit

.<line>

Specifies extcommunity attributes with regular

expression.

<AS:NN>

Specifies the valid value for an extcommunity number.

This format represents the 32 bit extcommunities value,

where AA is the high order 16 bits and NN is the low order

16 bits in digit format.

<ip-address>

Specifies the IP address to deny or permit.

Regular expressions listed below are used with the ip extcommunity-list expanded

command:

Symbol

Character

Meaning

Caret

Used to match the beginning of the input string.

When used at the beginning of a string of

characters, it negates a pattern match.

Dollar sign

Period

Used to match the end of the input string.

Used to match a single character (white spaces

included).

Asterisk

Plus sign

Used to match none or more sequences of a

pattern.

Used to match one or more sequences of a pattern.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.72

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Symbol

Character

Meaning (cont’d)

Question mark

Used to match none or one occurrence of a

pattern.

Underscore

Used to match spaces, commas, braces,

parenthesis, or the beginning and end of an input

string.

[ ]

Brackets

Hyphen

Specifies a range of single-characters.

Separates the end points of a range.

Mode Global Configuration

Examples

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

ip extcommunity-list 125 permit 4567335

ip extcommunity-list expanded CLIST permit .*

show ip extcommunity-list (BGP and BGP4+)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.73

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

ip extcommunity-list standard (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to create and delete a standard extended community list.

Use the no variant of this command to delete a standard extended community-list entry.

Syntax ip extcommunity-list <1-99> {deny|permit} {rt|soo} <community-number>

ip extcommunity-list standard <standard-listname> {deny|permit}

{rt|soo} <community-number>

no ip extcommunity-list <1-99> [{deny|permit} {rt|soo}

<community-number>]

no ip extcommunity-list standard <standard-listname> [{deny|permit}

{rt|soo} <community-number>]

Parameter

Description

<1-99>

Standard extcommunity list number.

standard

Specifies a standard extended community list.

<standard-listname> Standard extended community list entry.

deny

Specifies the extended community to reject.

permit

Specifies the extended community to accept.

Specifies the route target of the extended community.

Specifies the site of origin of the extended community.

soo

<community-number>

Specifies the valid value for an extended community

number.

This can be one of two formats:

■

<ASN:NN> where ASNis an AS (Autonomous System)

number and NNis a value chosen by the ASN

administrator

■

<A.B.C.D:NN> where A.B.C.Dis an IPv4 address,

and NNis a value chosen by the ASN administrator.

Note that ASNand NNare both integers from 1 to

4294967295.

AS numbers are assigned to the regional registries by

IANA (www.iana.org) and must be obtained in your

region.

Mode Global Configuration

Examples

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

ip extcommunity-list 36 permit rt 5675:50

ip extcommunity-list standard CLIST permit soo

7645:70

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.74

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

ip extcommunity-list 36 deny rt 192.168.1.1:70

ip extcommunity-list standard CLIST deny soo

10.10.1.1:50

show ip extcommunity-list (BGP and BGP4+)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.75

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

ip prefix-list (IPv4 Prefix List)

Use this command to create an entry for an IPv4 prefix list.

Use the no variant of this command to delete the IPv4 prefix-list entry.

Syntax ip prefix-list <list-name> [seq <1-429496725>]

{deny|permit}

{any|<ip-prefix>}

[ge <0-32>] [le <0-32>]

ip prefix-list <list-name> description <text>

ip prefix-list sequence-number

no ip prefix-list <list-name> [seq <1-429496725>]

no ip prefix-list <list-name> [description <text>]

no ip prefix-list sequence-number

Parameter

Description

<list-name>

Specifies the name of a prefix list.

seq <1-429496725>

deny

Sequence number of the prefix list entry.

Specifies that the prefixes are excluded from the list.

Specifies that the prefixes are included in the list.

permit

<ip-prefix>

Specifies the IPv4 address and length of the network

mask in dotted decimal in the format A.B.C.D/M.

any

Any prefix match. Same as 0.0.0.0/0 le 32.

Specifies the minimum prefix length to be matched.

Specifies the maximum prefix length to be matched.

Text description of the prefix list.

ge <0-32>

le <0-32>

description <text>

sequence-number

Specify sequence numbers included or excluded in prefix

list.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage When the device processes a prefix list, it starts to match prefixes from the top of the prefix

list, and stops whenever a permit or deny occurs. To promote efficiency, use the seq

parameter and place common permits or denials towards the top of the list. If you do not

use the seq parameter, the sequence values are generated in a sequence of 5.

The parameters ge and le specify the range of the prefix lengths to be matched. When

setting these parameters, set the le value to be less than 32, and the ge value to be less

than or equal to the le value and greater than the ip-prefix mask length.

Prefix lists implicitly exclude prefixes that are not explicitly permitted in the prefix list. This

means if a prefix that is being checked against the prefix list reaches the end of the prefix

list without matching a permit or deny, this prefix will be denied.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.76

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Example In the below sample configuration, the last ip prefix-listcommand in the below

list matches all, and the first ip prefix-list command denies the IP network

76.2.2.0:

router bgp 100

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config)#

network 172.1.1.0

network 172.1.2.0

neighbor 10.6.5.3 remote-as 300

neighbor 10.6.5.3 prefix-list mylist out

exit

ip prefix-list mylist seq 5 deny

76.2.2.0/24

ip prefix-list mylist seq 100 permit any

awplus(config)#

To deny the IP addresses between 10.0.0.0/14(10.0.0.0 255.252.0.0) and

10.0.0.0/22(10.0.0.0 255.255.252.0) within the 10.0.0.0/8 (10.0.0.0

255.0.0.0) addressing range, enter the following commands:.

configure terminal

awplus#

ip prefix-list mylist seq 12345 deny 10.0.0.0/

8 ge 14 le 22

awplus(config)#

Related Commands ipv6 prefix-list (IPv6 Prefix List)

show ip prefix-list (IPv4 Prefix List)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.77

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

ipv6 prefix-list (IPv6 Prefix List)

Use this command to create an IPv6 prefix list or an entry in an existing prefix list.

Use the no variant of this command to delete a whole prefix list or a prefix list entry.

Syntax ipv6 prefix-list <list-name> [seq <1-429496725>]

{deny|permit}

{any|<ipv6-prefix>}

[ge <0-128>] [le <0-128>]

ipv6 prefix-list <list-name> description <text>

no ipv6 prefix-list <list-name> [seq <1-429496725>]

no ipv6 prefix-list <list-name> [description <text>]

Parameter

Description

<list-name>

Specifies the name of a prefix list.

seq <1-429496725>

deny

Sequence number of the prefix list entry.

Specifies that the prefixes are excluded from the list.

Specifies that the prefixes are included in the list.

permit

<ipv6-prefix>

Specifies the IPv6 prefix and prefix length in hexadecimal in

the format X:X::X:X/M.

any

Any prefix match. Same as ::0/0 le 128.

ge <0-128>

le <0-128>

description

<text>

Specifies the minimum prefix length to be matched.

Specifies the maximum prefix length to be matched.

Prefix list specific description.

Up to 80 characters of text description of the prefix list.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage When the device processes a prefix list, it starts to match prefixes from the top of the prefix

list, and stops whenever a permit or deny occurs. To promote efficiency, use the seq parameter

and place common permits or denials towards the top of the list. If you do not use the seq

parameter, the sequence values are generated in a sequence of 5.

The parameters ge and le specify the range of the prefix lengths to be matched. The

parameters ge and le are only used if an ip-prefix is stated. When setting these parameters, set

the le value to be less than 128, and the ge value to be less than or equal to the le value and

greater than the ip-prefix mask length.

Prefix lists implicitly exclude prefixes that are not explicitly permitted in the prefix list. This

means if a prefix that is being checked against the prefix list reaches the end of the prefix list

without matching a permit or deny, this prefix will be denied.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.78

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Example To check the first 32 bits of the prefix 2001:db8::and the subnet mask must be greater

than or equal to 34 and less than or equal to 40, enter the following commands:

configure terminal

awplus#

ipv6 prefix-list mylist seq 12345 permit

2001:db8::/32 ge 34 le 40

awplus(config)#

Related Commands ip prefix-list (IPv4 Prefix List)

show ipv6 prefix-list (IPv6 Prefix List)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.79

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

match as-path (Route Map)

Use this command to add an autonomous system (AS) path match clause to a route map

entry. Specify the AS path attribute value or values to match by specifying the name of an

AS path access list. To create the AS path access list, enter Global Configuration mode and

use the ip as-path access-list (BGP and BGP4+) command.

A BGP update message matches the route map if its attributes include AS path values that

match the AS path access list.

Each entry of a route map can only match against one AS path access list in one AS path

match clause. If the route map entry already has an AS path match clause, entering this

command replaces that match clause with the new clause.

Note that AS path access lists and route map entries both specify an action of deny or

permit. The action in the AS path access list determines whether the route map checks

update messages for a given AS path value. The route map action and its set clauses

determine what the route map does with update messages that contain that AS path

value.

Use the no variant of this command to remove the AS path match clause from a route map

entry.

Syntax match as-path <as-path-listname>

no match as-path [<as-path-listname>]

Parameter

Description

<as-path-listname> Specifies an AS path access list name.

Mode Route-map Configuration

Usage This command is valid for BGP update messages only.

Example To add entry 34to the route map called myroute, which will discard update messages if

they contain the AS path values that are included in myaccesslist, use the commands:

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

route-map myroute deny 34

match as-path myaccesslist

awplus(config-route-map)#

Related Commands ip as-path access-list (BGP and BGP4+)

set community (Route Map)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.80

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

match community (Route Map)

Use this command to add a community match clause to a route map entry. Specify the

community value or values to match by specifying a community list. To create the

community list, enter Global Configuration mode and use the ip community-list (BGP

and BGP4+) command.

A BGP update message matches the route map if its attributes include community values

that match the community list.

Each entry of a route map can only match against one community list in one community

match clause. If the route map entry already has a community match clause, entering this

command replaces that match clause with the new clause.

Note that community lists and route map entries both specify an action of deny or permit.

The action in the community list determines whether the route map checks update

messages for a given community value. The route map action and its set clauses

determine what the route map does with update messages that contain that community

value.

Use the no variant of this command to remove the community match clause from a route

map.

Syntax match community {<community-listname>|<1-99>|<100-199>}[exact-match]

no match community [<community-listname>|<1-99>|<100-199>|exact-

match]

Parameter

Description

<community-listname>

The community list name or number.

<1-99>

Community list number (standard range).

Community list number (expanded range).

Exact matching of communities.

<100-199>

exact-match

Mode Route-map Configuration

Usage This command is valid for BGP update messages only.

Communities are used to group and filter routes. They are designed to provide the ability

to apply policies to large numbers of routes by using match and set commands.

Community lists are used to identify and filter routes by their common attributes.

Example To add entry 3to the route map called myroute, which will process update messages if

they contain the community values that are included in mylist, use the commands:

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

route-map myroute permit 3

match community mylist

awplus(config-route-map)#

Related Commands route-map (Route Map)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.81

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor activate (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to enable the exchange of BGP IPv4 and BGP4+ IPv6 routes with a

neighboring router, and also within either an IPv4 or an IPv6 specific address-family.

Use the no variant of this command to disable the exchange of information with a BGP or

BGP4+ neighbor, in the Router Configuration or the Address Family Configuration mode.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] neighbor <neighborid> activate

no neighbor <neighborid> activate

Parameter

Description

<neighborid> {<ip-address>|<ipv6-addr>|<peer-group>}

<ip-address> Specify the address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor, in

dotted decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr>

Specify the address of an IPv6 BGP4+ neighbor,

entered in hexadecimal in the format X:X::X:X.

<peer-group> Enter the name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups, refer

command on page 3.159. When this parameter

is used with this command, the command

applies on all peers in the specified group.

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration for a VRF instance

Mode [BGP4+] IPv6 Address Family Configuration

Usage [BGP] Use this command to enable the exchange of information to a neighbor. To exchange

IPv4 or IPv6 prefixes with a BGP or a BGP4+ peer, you must configure this command for

the peer or the peer group. This command only enables the exchange of information. You

can establish peering without this command, but no prefixes and other information is

sent until you apply this command to the neighbor.

This command triggers the switch to start a BGP or BGP4+ peering relationship with the

specified BGP or BGP4+ neighbor and start exchanging routes with that neighbor. The

command is required for neighbors configured in Address-Family Configuration mode,

but it is not required in Router Configuration mode (that it, it does not affect the device’s

behavior).

Examples [BGP] To enable an exchange of routes with a neighboring router with the IPv4 address

10.10.10.1, enter the commands as shown below:

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 10.10.10.1 activate

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.82

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

To disable an exchange of routes with a neighboring router with the IPv4 address

10.10.10.1, enter the commands as shown below:

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor 10.10.10.1 activate

awplus(config-router)#

To enable an exchange of routes in Address Family Configuration mode with a

neighboring router with the IPv4 address 10.10.10.1, enter the commands as shown

below:

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv4

neighbor 10.10.10.1 activate

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

To disable an exchange of routes in Address Family Configuration mode with a

neighboring router with the IPv4 address 10.10.10.1, enter the commands as shown

below:

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

address-family ipv4

no neighbor 10.10.10.1 activate

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

To enable an exchange of routes with a neighboring router with the peer-group named

group1, enter the commands as shown below:

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.0.63 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.0.63 peer-group group1

neighbor group1 activate

awplus(config-router)#

To disable an exchange of routes with a neighboring router with the peer-group named

group1, enter the commands as shown below:

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor group1 activate

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.83

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP4+] To enable an exchange of routes in IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode with a

neighboring router with the IPv6 address 2001:0db8:010d::1, enter the commands

as shown below:

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 activate

To disable an exchange of routes in IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode with a

neighboring router with the IPv6 address 2001:0db8:010d::1, enter the commands

as shown below:

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

activate

To enable an exchange of routes with a neighboring router with the peer-group named

group1, enter the commands as shown below:

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-as

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

peer-group group1

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor group1 activate

awplus(config-router-af)#

To disable an exchange of routes with a neighboring router with the peer-group named

group1, enter the commands as shown below:

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

no neighbor group1 activate

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.84

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor advertisement-interval (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to set the minimum interval between sending iBGP or eBGP routing

updates for a given route. This command reduces the flapping of individual routes.

Use the no variant of this command to set the interval time to the default values

(30 seconds for eBGP peers and 5 seconds for iBGP peers) for a given route.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] neighbor <neighborid> advertisement-interval <time>

no neighbor <neighborid> advertisement-interval [<time>]

Parameter

Description

<neighborid> {<ip-address>|<ipv6-addr>|<peer-group>}

<ip-address> Specify the address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor,

in dotted decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr>

Specify the address of an IPv6 BGP4+

neighbor, entered in hexadecimal in the

format X:X::X:X.

<peer-group> Enter the name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups,

refer to the neighbor peer-group (add a

this parameter is used with this command,

the command applies on all peers in the

specified group. Note that if you apply an

advertisement-interval value to a peer group

it will apply to all members in the peer group.

<time>

<0-600>

Advertisement -interval value in seconds.

Default [BGP/BGP4+] The default interval between sending routing updates for a given route to eBGP peers is

30 seconds, and the default interval for a given route to iBGP peers is 5 seconds.

Mode [BGP/BGP4+] Router Configuration

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] Use this command to set the minimum interval between sending iBGP or eBGP routing

updates for a given route. To reduce the flapping of routes to the internet, set a minimum

advertisement interval, so iBGP or eBGP routing updates are sent per interval seconds.

BGP dampening can also be used to control the effects of flapping routes. See the bgp

dampening (BGP and BGP4+) command in this chapter, and the BGP and BGP4+ Route

Dampening section in the BGP and BGP4+ Introduction chapter for more information.

The advertisement-interval time value is the minimum time between the advertisement

of Update messages sent from a BGP speaker to report changes to eBGP or iBGP peers.

This is the minimum time between two Update messages sent to iBGP or eBGP peers.

See the neighbor as-origination-interval (BGP and BGP4+) command to set the

interval time between messages to iBGP peers, which have prefixes within the local AS.

Use this command instead of the neighbor as-origination-interval (BGP and BGP4+)

command for eBGP peers with prefixes not in the same AS and updates not in a local AS.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.85

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 10.10.0.3

awplus(config-router)#

advertisement-interval 45

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 10.10.0.3

advertisement-interval

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.0.3 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.0.3 peer-group group1

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 advertisement-interval

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor group1

awplus(config-router)#

advertisement-interval

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.86

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP4+]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

advertisement-interval 45

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

advertisement-interval

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-as

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 peer-group

group1

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor group1

awplus(config-router-af)#

advertisement-interval 45

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor group1

advertisement-interval

Validation show bgp ipv6 neighbors (BGP4+)

Commands

neighbor peer-group (add a neighbor) (BGP and BGP+)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.87

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor allowas-in (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to accept an AS_PATH with the specified Autonomous System (AS)

number from inbound updates for both BGP and BGP4+ routes.

This command allows BGP and BGP4+ to accept prefixes with the same ASN in the

AS_PATH attribute. This command allows BGP and BGP4+ to accept up to 10 instances,

configured by the <occurrences>placeholder, of its own AN in the AS_PATH for a prefix.

Use the no variant of this command to revert to default functionality (disabled by default).

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] neighbor <neighborid> allowas-in <occurrences>

no neighbor <neighborid> allowas-in

Parameter

Description

<neighborid> {<ip-address>|<ipv6-addr>|<peer-group>}

<ip-address> Specify the address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor, in

dotted decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr>

Specify the address of an IPv6 BGP4+ neighbor,

entered in hexadecimal in the format X:X::X:X.

<peer-group> Enter the name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups, refer

command on page 3.159. When this parameter

is used with this command, the command

applies on all peers in the specified group.

<occurrences> <1-10> Specifies the number of occurrences of the AS number.

Default [BGP/BGP4+] Disabled

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration

Mode [BGP4+] IPv6 Address Family Configuration

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] Use this command to configure PE (Provider Edge) routers to allow re-advertisement of all

prefixes containing duplicate Autonomous System Numbers (ASNs). In a hub and spoke

configuration, a PE router re-advertises all prefixes containing duplicate ASNs. Specify the

remote-as or peer-group first using the related commands. The command allows a

receiving peer to accept prefixes with its own AN in the AS_PATH, up the maximum

number of instances, as configured by the <occurrences>placeholder.

Examples [BGP]

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor 10.10.0.1 allowas-in 3

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.88

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv4

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 10.10.0.1 allowas-in 3

configure terminal

awplus#

router bgp 10

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 10.10.0.1 allowas-in

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

address-family ipv4

no neighbor 10.10.0.1 allowas-in

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.0.1 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.0.1 peer-group group1

neighbor group1 allowas-in 3

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv4

neighbor group1 allowas-in 3

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

Examples [BGP4+]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

allowas-in 3

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.89

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

allowas-in

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

remote-as 10

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

peer-group group1

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor group1 allowas-in 3

awplus(config-router-af)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

neighbor group1 allowas-in 3

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.90

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor as-origination-interval (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to adjust the sending of AS (Autonomous System) origination routing

updates to a specified iBGP peer. This command adjusts the rate at which updates are sent

to a specified iBGP peer (15 seconds by default). You must set a rate when you enable it.

The as-origination-interval is the minimum time set between the advertisement of Update

messages sent from a BGP speaker to an iBGP peer to report changes within the local AS.

Use the no variant of this command to reset the timer to the default value of 15 seconds.

Syntax [BGP] neighbor <neighbor_address> as-origination-interval <time>

no neighbor <neighbor_address> as-origination-interval [<time>]

Syntax [BGP4+] neighbor <ipv6-addr> as-origination-interval <time>

no neighbor <ipv6-addr> as-origination-interval [<time>]

Parameter

Description

<neighbor_address> Specify a neighbor IPv4 address, in dotted decimal in the

format A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr>

<time>

Specify an address of an IPv6 BGP4+ neighbor, entered in

hexadecimal in the format X:X::X:X.

<1-600> Time in seconds.

Default [BGP/BGP4+] The default interval between sending routing updates to iBGP peers, which include a

prefix that originates from the local AS, is 15 seconds by default.

Mode [BGP/BGP4+] Router Configuration

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] This command is used to change the minimum interval between sending AS-origination

routing updates. The update interval for iBGP peers can be set from 1 to 600 seconds.

For interoperability with other vendors’ devices, we recommend using the default value.

The AS origination interval timer may not be available to adjust on other vendors’ devices.

Applying the default of 15 seconds across the AS maintains a common timer policy.

AlliedWare Plus devices use the default 15 second AS Origination Interval timer as per

RFC 4271, a 30 second keepalive timer, a 90 second hold timer, a 120 second connect

timer, a 5 second iBGP peer route advertisement interval, and a 30 second eBGP peer

route advertisement interval.

Cisco devices use a 60 second keepalive timer, a 180 second hold timer, and no iBGP peer

route interval timer (0 ). Juniper devices use a 10 second AS Origination Interval timer.

The as-origination-interval time value is the minimum amount of time between the

advertisement of Update messages sent from a BGP speaker to report changes within the

local AS. This is the minimum time between two Update messages to iBGP peers, which

contain a prefix that originates from the same AS. See the neighbor advertisement-

interval (BGP and BGP4+) command to set time between messages to eBGP peers.

Use this command instead of the neighbor advertisement-interval (BGP and BGP4+)

command for iBGP peers with prefixes in the same AS for updates only within a local AS.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.91

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP]

configure terminal

router bgp 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 10.10.0.1

awplus(config-router)#

as-origination-interval 10

configure terminal

router bgp 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 10.10.0.1

as-origination-interval

awplus(config-router)#

Examples [BGP4+]

configure terminal

router bgp 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

as-origination-interval 10

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

as-origination-interval

awplus(config-router)#

Validation show bgp ipv6 neighbors (BGP4+)

Commands

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.92

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor attribute-unchanged (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to advertise unchanged BGP or BGP4+ attributes to the specified BGP

or BGP4+ neighbor.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this function.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] neighbor <neighborid> attribute-unchanged {as-path|next-hop|med}

no neighbor <neighborid> attribute-unchanged {as-path|next-hop|med}

Parameter

Description

<neighborid> {<ip-address>|ipv6-addr>|<peer-group>}

<ip-address> Specify the address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor, in

dotted decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr>

Specify the address of an IPv6 BGP4+ neighbor,

entered in hexadecimal in the format X:X::X:X.

<peer-group> Enter the name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups, refer

command on page 3.159. When this parameter

is used with this command, the command

applies on all peers in the specified group.

as-path

next-hop

med

AS path attribute.

Next hop attribute.

Multi Exit Discriminator.

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration

Mode [BGP4+] IPv6 Address Family Configuration

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] Note that specifying this command with the optional as-path parameter has the same

effect as invoking the neighbor transparent-as (BGP and BGP4+) command.

Note this specifying this command with the optional next-hop parameter has the same

effect as invoking the neighbor transparent-nexthop (BGP and BGP4+) command.

Examples [BGP]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 10.10.0.75 attribute-unchanged

as-path med

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.93

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 10.10.0.75

awplus(config-router)#

attribute-unchanged as-path med

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

address-family ipv4

neighbor 10.10.0.75

attribute-unchanged as-path med

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv4

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor 10.10.0.75

attribute-unchanged as-path med

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.0.75 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.0.75 peer-group group1

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 attribute-unchanged

as-path med

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor group1 attribute-unchanged

as-path med

awplus(config-router)#

Examples [BGP4+]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

address-family ipv6

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

attribute-unchanged as-path med

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.94

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

attribute-unchanged as-path med

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-as

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

peer-group group1

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor group1 attribute-unchanged

as-path med

awplus(config-router-af)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor group1

attribute-unchanged as-path med

neighbor transparent-as (BGP and BGP4+)

neighbor transparent-nexthop (BGP and BGP4+)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.95

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor capability graceful-restart (BGP and

BGP4+)

Use this command to configure the device to advertise the Graceful Restart Capability to

BGP and BGP4+ neighbors.

Use the no variant of this command to configure the device so it does not advertise the

Graceful Restart Capability to its neighbor.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] neighbor <neighborid> capability graceful-restart

no neighbor <neighborid> capability graceful-restart

Parameter

Description

<neighborid> {<ip-address>|<ipv6-addr>|<peer-group>}

<ip-address>

Specify the address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor, in

dotted decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr>

Specify the address of an IPv6 BGP4+ neighbor,

entered in hexadecimal in the format X:X::X:X.

<peer-group> Enter the name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups, refer

neighbor peer-group (add a neighbor) (BGP and BGP+)

command on page 3.159. When this parameter

is used with this command, the command

applies on all peers in the specified group.

Default [BGP/BGP4+] Disabled

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration

Mode [BGP4+] IPv6 Address Family Configuration

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] Use the neighbor capability graceful-restart command to advertise to the BGP or BGP4+

neighbor routers the capability of graceful restart. First specify the BGP or BGP4+

neighbor’s remote-as identification number as assigned by the neighbor router.

The graceful restart capability is advertised only when the graceful restart capability has

been enabled using the bgp graceful-restart (BGP and BGP4+) command on page 3.32.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.96

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 10.10.10.50 capability

graceful-restart

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 10.10.10.50 capability

graceful-restart

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

address-family ipv4

neighbor 10.10.10.50 capability

graceful-restart

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv4

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor 10.10.10.50 capability

graceful-restart

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.10.50 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.10.50 peer-group group1

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 capability

graceful-restart

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor group1 capability

graceful-restart

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.97

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP4+]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 capability

graceful-restart

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

capability graceful-restart

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-as

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 peer-group

group1

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor group1 capability

graceful-restart

awplus(config-router-af)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor group1 capability

graceful-restart

Related Commands bgp graceful-restart (BGP and BGP4+)

restart bgp graceful (BGP)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.98

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor capability orf prefix-list (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to advertise ORF (Outbound Route Filters) capability to neighbors. Use

this command to dynamically filter updates. The BGP speaker can advertise a prefix list

with prefixes it wishes the peer to prune or filter from outgoing updates.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this function.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] neighbor <neighborid> capability orf prefix-list {both|receive|send}

no neighbor <neighborid> capability orf prefix-list {both|receive|

send}

Parameter

Description

<neighborid> {<ip-address>|<ipv6-addr>|<peer-group>}

<ip-address>

Specify the address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor,

in dotted decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr>

<peer-group>

Specify the address of an IPv6 BGP4+

neighbor, entered in hexadecimal in the

format X:X::X:X.

Enter the name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups,

refer to the neighbor peer-group (add a

neighbor peer-group (add a neighbor) (BGP and BGP+)

this parameter is used with this command, the

command applies on all peers in the specified

group.

orf

Advertises ORF capability to its neighbors.

both

Indicates that the local router can send ORF entries to its peer as well

as receive ORF entries from its peer.

receive

send

Indicates that the local router is willing to receive ORF entries from

its peer.

Indicates that the local router is willing to send ORF entries to its

peer.

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration for a VRF instance

Mode [BGP4+] IPv6 Address Family Configuration

Default [BGP/BGP4+] Disabled

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] Outbound Route Filters (ORFs) send and receive capabilities to lessen the number of

updates exchanged between neighbors. By filtering updates, this option minimizes

generating and processing of updates. The local router advertises the ORF capability in

sendmode and the remote router receives the ORF capability in receive mode applying

the filter as outbound policy. The two routers exchange updates to maintain the ORF for

each router. Only an individual router or a peer-group can be configured to be in receive

or send mode. A peer-group member cannot be configured in receive or send mode.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.99

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 10.10.0.5 capability orf

prefix-list both

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 10.10.0.5 capability orf

prefix-list both

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv4

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 10.10.0.5 capability orf

prefix-list both

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv4

awplus(config-router)#

no neighbor 10.10.0.5 capability orf

prefix-list both

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.0.5 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.0.5 peer-group group1

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 capability orf

prefix-list both

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor group1 capability orf

prefix-list both

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.100

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP4+]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 capability

orf prefix-list both

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

capability orf prefix-list both

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-as

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 peer-group

group1

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor group1 capability orf

prefix-list both

awplus(config-router-af)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor group1 capability orf

prefix-list both

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.101

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor capability route-refresh (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to advertise route-refresh capability to the specified BGP and BGP4+

neighbors.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this function

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] neighbor <neighborid> capability route-refresh

no neighbor <neighborid> capability route-refresh

Parameter

Description

<neighborid> {<ip-address>|ipv6-addr>|<peer-group>}

<ip-address> Specify the address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor, in

dotted decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr>

Specify the address of an IPv6 BGP4+ neighbor,

entered in hexadecimal in the format X:X::X:X.

<peer-group> Enter the name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups, refer

command on page 3.159. When this parameter

is used with this command, the command

applies on all peers in the specified group.

Mode [BGP/BGP4+] Router Configuration

Default [BGP/BGP4+] Enabled

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] Use this command to advertise to peer about route refresh capability support. If route

refresh capability is supported, then router can dynamically request that the peer

readvertises its Adj-RIB-Out.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.102

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 10.10.10.1 capability route-

refresh

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 10.10.10.1 capability

route-refresh

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.1.1 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.1.1 peer-group group1

neighbor group1 capability route-refresh

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor group1 capability route-

refresh

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.103

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP4+]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 capability

route-refresh

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 capability

route-refresh

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-as

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 peer-group

group1

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit

awplus(config-router-af)#

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 capability

route-refresh

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor group1 capability

route-refresh

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.104

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor collide-established (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to specify including a BGP or BGP4+ neighbor, already in an

'established' state, for conflict resolution when a TCP connection collision is detected.

Use the no variant of this command to remove a BGP or BGP4+ neighbor, already in an

‘established’ state, for conflict resolution when a TCP connection collision is detected.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] neighbor <neighborid> collide-established

no neighbor <neighborid> collide-established

Parameter

Description

<neighborid> {<ip-address>|<ipv6-addr>|<peer-group>}

<ip-address> Specify the address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor,

in dotted decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr>

Specify the address of an IPv6 BGP4+

neighbor, entered in hexadecimal in the

format X:X::X:X.

<peer-group> Enter the name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups,

refer to the neighbor peer-group (add a

this parameter is used with this command, the

command applies on all peers in the specified

group.

Mode [BGP/BGP4+] Router Configuration

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] This command must be used only when specially required. It is not required in most

network deployments.

The associated functionality of including an 'established' neighbor into TCP connection

collision conflict resolution is automatically enabled when neighbor is configured for BGP

graceful-restart.

Examples [BGP]

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor 10.10.10.1 collide-established

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 10.10.10.1

collide-established

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.105

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.10.1 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.10.1 peer-group group1

neighbor group1 collide-established

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor group1 collide-established

awplus(config-router)#

Examples [BGP4+]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

collide-established

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

collide-established

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

remote-as 10

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

peer-group group1

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit

awplus(config-router-af)#

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 collide-established

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor group1 collide-established

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.106

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

(add a neighbor) (BGP and BGP+)

neighbor default-originate (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to allow a BGP or BGP4+ local router to send the default route to a

neighbor.

Use the no variant of this command to send no route as a default route.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] neighbor {<neighborid>} default-originate [route-map <routemap-name>]

no neighbor {<neighborid>} default-originate [route-map <routemap-

name>]

Parameter

Description

{<ip-address>|<ipv6-addr>|<peer-group>}

<ip-

address>

Specify the address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor,

in dotted decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr> Specify the address of an IPv6 BGP4+

neighbor, entered in hexadecimal in the

format X:X::X:X.

<peer-

group>

Enter the name of an existing peer-group.

For information on how to create peer

groups, refer to the neighbor peer-group

command on page 3.144, and neighbor

route-map (BGP and BGP4+) command on

page 3.159. When this parameter is used

with this command, the command applies on

all peers in the specified group.

route-map

If a route-map is specified, then the route table must contain at

least one route that matches the permit criteria of the route

map before the default route will be advertised to the specified

neighbor.

<routemap-name> Enter the route-map name.

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration for a VRF instance

Mode [BGP4+] IPv6 Address Family Configuration

Examples [BGP]

configure terminal

awplus#

router bgp 10

awplus(config)#

neighbor 10.10.10.1 default-originate

route-map myroute

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.107

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 10.10.10.1

awplus(config-router)#

default-originate route-map myroute

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv4

neighbor 10.10.10.1

default-originate route-map

myroute

awplus(config-router-af)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv4

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 10.10.10.1

awplus(config-router-af)#

default-originate route-map myroute

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.10.1 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.10.1 peer-group group1

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 default-originate

route-map myroute

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor group1 default-originate

route-map myroute

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.108

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP4+]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

default-originate route-map myroute

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

default-originate route-map myroute

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-as

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

peer-group group1

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor group1 default-originate

route-map myroute

awplus(config-router-af)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor group1 default-originate

route-map myroute

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.109

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor description (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to associate a description with a BGP or a BGP4+ neighbor. We

recommend adding descriptions to defined neighbors, so any network administrators or

network engineers can see a description of connected BGP or BGP4+ peers on the switch.

Use the no variant of this command to remove the description from a BGP or a BGP4+

neighbor.

Syntax neighbor <neighborid> description <description>

no neighbor <neighborid> description [<description>]

Parameter

Description

<neighborid> {<ip-address>|<ipv6-addr>|<peer-group>}

<ip-address>

Specify the address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor, in

dotted decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr>

Specify the address of an IPv6 BGP4+

neighbor, entered in hexadecimal in the

format X:X::X:X.

<peer-group> Enter the name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups,

refer to the neighbor peer-group (add a

this parameter is used with this command, the

command applies on all peers in the specified

group.

<description> Enter up to 80 characters of text describing the neighbor.

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration for a VRF instance

Mode [BGP4+] Router Configuration

Examples [BGP]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 10.10.10.1 description Backup

router for sales

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor 10.10.10.1 description

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.110

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 10.10.10.1 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.10.1 peer-group group1

neighbor group1 description Backup

router for sales

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor group1 description Backup

router for sales.

awplus(config-router)#

Examples [BGP4+]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

awplus(config-router)#

description Backup router for sales

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

description

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-as

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 peer-group

group1

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit

awplus(config-router-af)#

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 description Backup

router for sales

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.111

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor group1 description Backup

router for sales

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor) (BGP and BGP+) and neighbor

neighbor disallow-infinite-holdtime (BGP and

BGP4+)

Use this command to disallow the configuration of infinite holdtime for BGP and BGP4+.

Use the no variant of this command to allow the configuration of infinite holdtime for BGP

or BGP4+.

Syntax [BGP] neighbor {<ip-address>} disallow-infinite-holdtime

no neighbor {<ip-address>} disallow-infinite-holdtime

Syntax [BGP4+] neighbor {<ipv6-addr>} disallow-infinite-holdtime

no neighbor {<ipv6-addr>} disallow-infinite-holdtime

Parameter

Description

<ip-address>

Specify the address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor, in dotted decimal

notation A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr>

Specify the address of an IPv6 BGP4+ neighbor, entered in

hexadecimal in the format X:X::X:X.

Mode [BGP/BGP4+] Router Configuration

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] This command enables the local BGP or BGP4+ speaker to reject holdtime “0” seconds

from the peer during exchange of open messages or the user during configuration.

The no variant of this command allows the BGP speaker to accept “0” holdtime from the

peer or during configuration.

Examples [BGP] To enable the disallow-infinite-holdtime feature on the BGP speaker with the IP address

of 10.10.10.1, enter the command:

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 10.10.10.1 disallow-infinite-

holdtime

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.112

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

To disable the disallow-infinite-holdtime feature on the BGP speaker with the IP address

of 10.10.10.10, enter the command:

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 10.10.10.1

awplus(config-router)#

disallow-infinite-holdtime

Examples [BGP4+] To enable the disallow-infinite-holdtime feature on the BGP4+ speaker with the IPv6

address of 2001:0db8:010d::1, enter the commands:

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

disallow-infinite-holdtime

awplus(config-router)#

To disable the disallow-infinite-holdtime feature on the BGP4+ speaker with the IPv6

address of 2001:0db8:010d::1, enter the commands:

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

disallow-infinite-holdtime

awplus(config-router)#

Related Commands neighbor timers (BGP and BGP4+)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.113

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor distribute-list (BGP and BGP4+)

This command filters route updates from a particular BGP or BGP4+ neighbor using an

access control list.

You can add one incoming and one outgoing distribute-list for each BGP or BGP4+

neighbor.

The no variant of this command removes a previously configured BGP or BGP4+

distribute-list.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] neighbor <neighborid> distribute-list <access-list> {in|out}

no neighbor <neighborid> distribute-list <access-list> {in|out}

Parameter

Description

Specify an identification method for the BGP or BGP4+ peer. Use

one of the following formats:

Specify the address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor,

in dotted decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<ip-address>

<ipv6-addr>

Specify the address of an IPv6 BGP4+

neighbor, entered in hexadecimal in the

format X:X::X:X.

Enter the name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups,

refer to the neighbor peer-group (add a

route-map (BGP and BGP4+) commands.

When this parameter is used with this

command, the command applies on all peers in

the specified group.

<peer-group>

The specific access-list used to filter routes. Specify one of the

following types of access-lists:

<access-list>

The name of IP access-list.

<WORD>

The ID number of a standard IP access-list.

The ID number of an extended IP access-list.

<1-199>

<1300-2699>

Indicates that incoming advertised routes will be filtered.

Indicates that outgoing advertised routes will be filtered.

out

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration for a VRF instance

Mode [BGP4+] IPv6 Address Family Configuration

Examples [BGP]

configure terminal

awplus#

router bgp 10

awplus(config)#

neighbor 10.10.10.1 distribute-list

mylist out

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.114

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 10.10.10.1 distribute-list

mylist out

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

address-family ipv4

neighbor 10.10.10.1 distribute-list

mylist out

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv4

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 10.10.10.1 distribute-

list mylist out

awplus(config-router-af)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.10.1 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.10.1 peer-group group1

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 10.10.10.1 distribute-list

mylist out

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 10.10.10.1 distribute-list

mylist out

awplus(config-router)#

Examples [BGP4+]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

address-family ipv6

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

distribute-list mylist out

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.115

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

distribute-list mylist out

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-as

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 peer-group

group1

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

distribute-list mylist out

awplus(config-router-af)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

distribute-list mylist out

neighbor) (BGP and BGP+) and neighbor

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.116

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor dont-capability-negotiate (BGP and

BGP4+)

Use this command to disable capability negotiation for BGP and BGP4+.

The capability negotiation is performed by default. This command is used to allow

compatibility with older BGP versions that have no capability parameters used in open

messages between peers.

Use the no variant of this command to enable capability negotiation.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] neighbor <neighborid> dont-capability-negotiate

no neighbor <neighborid> dont-capability-negotiate

Parameter

Description

<neighborid> {<ip-address>|<ipv6-addr>|<peer-group>}

<ip-address>

<ipv6-addr>

Specify the IPv4 address of the BGP neighbor

in dotted decimal, in the format A.B.C.D.

Specify the IPv6 address of the BGP4+

neighbor, entered in hexadecimal in the

format X:X::X:X.

<peer-group>

Enter the name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups,

refer to the neighbor peer-group (add a

route-map (BGP and BGP4+) commands.

When this parameter is used with this

command, the command applies on all peers in

the specified group.

Mode [BGP/BGP4+] Router Configuration

Examples [BGP]

configure terminal

awplus#

router bgp 10

awplus(config)#

neighbor 10.10.0.34

awplus(config-router)#

dont-capability-negotiate

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 10.10.0.34

awplus(config-router)#

dont-capability-negotiate

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.117

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.10.34 remote-as 100

neighbor 10.10.10.34 peer-group group1

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1

dont-capability-negotiate

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor group1

awplus(config-router)#

dont-capability-negotiate

Examples [BGP4+]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 dont-

capability-negotiate

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

dont-capability-negotiate

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-as

100

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 peer-group

group1

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit

awplus(config-router-af)#

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1

dont-capability-negotiate

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.118

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor group1

awplus(config-router)#

dont-capability-negotiate

neighbor ebgp-multihop (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to accept and attempt BGP or BGP4+ connections to external peers on

indirectly connected networks.

Effectively, this command sets the TTL value in the BGP or BGP4+ packets that the router

sends to the neighbor, so that the packets may traverse the network route to the

neighbor.

The switch will not establish a connection to a multihop neighbor, if the only route to the

multihop peer is a default route.

Use the no variant of this command to return to the default.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] neighbor <neighborid> ebgp-multihop [<count>]

no neighbor <neighborid> ebgp-multihop [<count>]

Parameter

Description

<neighborid> {<ip-address|ipv6-addr|<peer-group>}

<ip-addr>

Specify the address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor,

entered in dotted decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr>

Specify the address of an IPv6 BGP4+ neighbor,

entered in hexadecimal in the format X:X::X:X.

<peer-group> Enter the name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups, refer

neighbor peer-group (add a neighbor) (BGP and BGP+)

command on page 3.159. When this parameter

is used with this command, the command

applies on all peers in the specified group.

<count>

<1-255> The Maximum hop count, that is set in the TTL field of the

BGP packets. If this optional parameter is not specified with the

command, then the Maximum hop count is set to 255.

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration for a VRF instance

Mode [BGP4+] Router Configuration

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.119

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP]

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor 10.10.10.34 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.10.34 ebgp-multihop 5

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor 10.10.10.34 ebgp-multihop 5

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.10.34 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.10.34 peer-group group1

neighbor group1 ebgp-multihop 5

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor group1 ebgp-multihop 5

awplus(config-router)#

Examples [BGP4+]

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-as 10

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

ebgp-multihop 5

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

ebgp-multihop 5

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.120

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-as

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

peer-group group1

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit

awplus(config-router-af)#

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 ebgp-multihop 5

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor group1 ebgp-multihop 5

awplus(config-router)#

Related Commands neighbor ebgp-multihop (BGP and BGP4+)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.121

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor enforce-multihop (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to enforce the requirement that BGP and BGP4+ neighbors form

multihop connections.

Use the no variant of this command to turn off this feature.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] neighbor <neighborid> enforce-multihop

no neighbor <neighborid> enforce-multihop

Parameter

Description

<neighborid> {<ip-address>|<ipv6-addr>|<peer-group>}

<ip-address> The address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor, in dotted

decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr>

The address of an IPv6 BGP4+ neighbor, entered

in hexadecimal in the format X:X::X:X.

<peer-group> Name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups, refer

command on page 3.159. When this parameter

is used with this command, the command

applies on all peers in the specified group.

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration for a VRF instance

Mode [BGP4+] Router Configuration

Examples [BGP]

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor 10.10.0.34 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.0.34 enforce-multihop

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor 10.10.0.34 enforce-multihop

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.122

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 10.10.10.34 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.10.34 peer-group group1

neighbor group1 enforce-multihop

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor group1 enforce-multihop

awplus(config-router)#

Examples [BGP4+]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-as

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

enforce-multihop

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

enforce-multihop

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-as

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 peer-group

group1

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit

awplus(config-router-af)#

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 enforce-multihop

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.123

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor group1 enforce-multihop

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.124

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor filter-list (BGP and BGP4+)

This command creates a BGP or BGP4+ filter using an AS (Autonomous System) path list.

This command specifies an AS path list, which it then applies to filter updates to and from

a BGP or a BGP4+ neighbor

The no variant of this command removes the previously specified BGP or BGP4+ filter

using access control lists.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] neighbor <neighborid> filter-list <listname> {in|out}

no neighbor <neighborid> filter-list <listname> {in|out}

Parameter

Description

Specify the identification method for the BGP or BGP4+ peer. Use

one of the following formats:

<ip-address> Specify the address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor, in

dotted decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr>

Specify the address of an IPv6 BGP4+ neighbor,

entered in hexadecimal in the format X:X::X:X.

<peer-group> Enter the name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups,

refer to the neighbor peer-group (add a

this parameter is used with this command, the

command applies on all peers in the specified

group.

Specify the name of an AS (Autonomous System) path list.

Indicates that incoming advertised routes will be filtered.

Indicates that outgoing advertised routes will be filtered.

out

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration for a VRF instance

Mode [BGP4+] IPv6 Address Family Configuration

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] This command specifies a filter for updates based on a BGP AS (Autonomous System) path

list.

Examples [BGP]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 10.10.0.34 filter-list list1

out

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.125

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 10.10.0.34 filter-list list1

out

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

address-family ipv4

neighbor 10.10.0.34 filter-list list1

out

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv4

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor 10.10.0.34 filter-list

list1 out

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.10.34 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.10.34 peer-group group1

neighbor group1 filter-list list1 out

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor group1 filter-list list1 out

awplus(config-router)#

Examples [BGP4+]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

address-family ipv6

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

filter-list list1 out

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.126

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

filter-list list1 out

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-as

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

peer-group group1

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor group1 filter-list list1 out

awplus(config-router-af)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor group1 filter-list list1

out

neighbor) (BGP and BGP+) and neighbor

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.127

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor interface (BGP4+)

Use this command to configure the interface name of a BGP4+ speaking neighbor.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this function.

Syntax [BGP4+] neighbor {<ipv6-addr>|<ipaddress>} interface <interface>

no neighbor {<ipv6-addr>|<ipaddress>} interface <interface>

Parameter

Description

<ipaddress> Specifies the IPv4 address of the BGP neighbor - entered in dotted

decimal notation in the format A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr> Specifies the IPv6 address of the BGP4+ neighbor, entered in

hexadecimal in the format X:X::X:X.

<interface> Specifies the interface name of BGP neighbor, e.g. vlan2.

Mode [BGP4+] Router Configuration

Usage [BGP4+] This command is for use with BGP4+ peering. Use this command for BGP peering with

IPv6 link local addresses.

Examples [BGP4+]

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor 10.10.0.72 interface vlan2

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor 10.10.0.72 interface vlan2

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 interface

vlan2

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

interface vlan2

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.128

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor local-as (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to configure a local AS number for the specified BGP or BGP4+

neighbor. This overrides the local AS number specified by the router bgp (BGP and

BGP4+) command on page 3.200.

Use the no variant of this command to remove the local AS number for the specified BGP

or BGP4+ neighbor.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] neighbor <neighborid> local-as <as-number>

no neighbor <neighborid> local-as <as-number>

Parameter

Description

<neighborid> {<ip-address>|<ipv6-addr>|<peer-group>}

<ip-address> The address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor, in

dotted decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr>

The address of an IPv6 BGP4+ neighbor,

entered in hexadecimal in the format X:X::X:X.

<peer-group> Enter the name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups,

refer to the neighbor peer-group (add a

route-map (BGP and BGP4+) commands.

When this parameter is used with this

command, the command applies on all peers in

the specified group.

<as-number>

<1-4294967295>Neighbor’s Autonomous System (AS)

number.

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration for a VRF instance

Mode [BGP4+] Router Configuration

Usage [VRF-Lite] When VRF-Lite is configured, this command allows internal BGP loopback connections

between named VRFs and the default global routing instance to be configured to act as

eBGP connections, instead of only iBGP.

Usage [BGP4+] When BGP4+ is configured, this command prepends the ASN as defined by the router

bgp (BGP and BGP4+) command, and adds the ASN as defined by the neighbor local-as

(BGP and BGP4+) command in front of the actual ASN as defined by the router bgp (BGP

and BGP4+) command. This makes the peer believe it is peering with the ASN as defined

by the neighbor local-as (BGP and BGP4+) command.

Examples [BGP]

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor 10.10.0.34 local-as 1

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.129

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor 10.10.0.34 local-as 1

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.10.34 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.10.34 peer-group group1

neighbor group1 local-as 1

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor group1 local-as 1

awplus(config-router)#

Examples [BGP4+]

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 local-as 1

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 local-as 1

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

address-family ipv6

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 peer-group

group1

exit

awplus(config-router-af)#

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 local-as 1

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.130

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor group1 local-as 1

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor maximum-prefix (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to control the number of prefixes that can be received from a BGP or a

BGP4+ neighbor.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this function. Do not specify threshold to

apply the default threshold of 75% for the maximum number of prefixes before this is

applied.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] neighbor <neighborid> maximum-prefix <maximum>

no neighbor <neighborid> maximum-prefix [<maximum>]

Parameter

Description

<neighborid> {<ip-address>|<ipv6-addr>|<peer-group>}

<ip-address> Specify the address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor, in

dotted decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr>

Specify the address of an IPv6 BGP4+ neighbor,

entered in hexadecimal in the format X:X::X:X.

<peer-group> Name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups, refer

command on page 3.159. When this parameter

is used with this command, the command

applies on all peers in the specified group.

<maxprefix> [<threshold>] [warning-only]

Specifies the maximum number of prefixes permitted.

<threshold> <1-100>Specifies the threshold value, 1 to 100 percent. 75% by

default.

warning-only Only gives a warning message when the limit is exceeded.

Default [BGP/BGP4+] The default threshold value is 75%. If the threshold value is not specified this default is

applied.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.131

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration for a VRF instance

Mode [BGP4+] IPv6 Address Family Configuration

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] The neighbor maximum-prefix command allows the configuration of a specified

number of prefixes that a BGP or a BGP4+ router is allowed to receive from a neighbor.

When the warning-onlyoption is not used, if any extra prefixes are received, the

router ends the peering. A terminated peer, stays down until the clear ip bgp command is

used.

Examples [BGP]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 10.10.0.72 maximum-prefix 1244

warning-only

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 10.10.0.72 maximum-prefix

1244 warning-only

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.10.72 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.10.72 peer-group group1

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 maximum-prefix 1244

warning-only

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor group1 maximum-prefix 1244

warning-only

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.132

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP4+]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

maximum-prefix 1244 warning-only

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

maximum-prefix 1244 warning-only

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

peer-group group1

neighbor group1 maximum-prefix 1244

warning-only

awplus(config-router-af)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor group1 maximum-prefix

1244 warning-only

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.133

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor next-hop-self (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to configure the BGP or BGP4+ router as the next hop for a BGP or

BGP4+ speaking neighbor or peer group.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this feature.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] neighbor <neighborid> next-hop-self

no neighbor <neighborid> next-hop-self

Parameter

Description

<neighborid> {<ip-address>|<ipv6-addr>|<peer-group>}

<ip-address> Specify the address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor, in

dotted decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr> Specify the address of an IPv6 BGP4+ neighbor,

entered in hexadecimal in the format X:X::X:X.

<peer-group> Enter the name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups, refer

command on page 3.159. When this parameter

is used with this command, the command

applies on all peers in the specified group.

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration for a VRF instance

Mode [BGP4+] IPv6 Address Family Configuration

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] This command allows a BGP or BGP4+ router to change the nexthop information that is

sent to the iBGP peer. The nexthop information is set to the IP address of the interface

used to communicate with the neighbor.

This command can be run for a specific VRF instance.

Examples [BGP]

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor 10.10.0.72 next-hop-self

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor 10.10.0.72 next-hop-self

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.134

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv4

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 10.10.0.72 next-hop-self

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

address-family ipv4

awplus(config-router)#

no neighbor 10.10.0.72 next-hop-self

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.10.72 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.10.72 peer-group group1

neighbor group1 next-hop-self

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor group1 next-hop-self

awplus(config-router)#

Examples [BGP4+]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

address-family ipv6

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

next-hop-self

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

next-hop-self

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.135

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-as

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 peer-group

group1

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor group1 next-hop-self

awplus(config-router-af)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

address-family ipv6

no neighbor group1 next-hop-self

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.136

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor override-capability (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to override a capability negotiation result for BGP and BGP4+.

Use the no variant of with this command to disable this function.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] neighbor <neighborid> override-capability

no neighbor <neighborid> override-capability

Parameter

Description

<neighborid> {<ip-address>|<ipv6-addr>|<peer-group>}

<ip-address> Specify the address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor,

in dotted decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr>

Specify the address of an IPv6 BGP4+

neighbor, entered in hexadecimal in the

format X:X::X:X.

<peer-group> Enter the name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups,

refer to the neighbor peer-group (add a

this parameter is used with this command, the

command applies on all peers in the specified

group.

Mode [BGP/BGP4+] Router Configuration

Examples [BGP]

configure terminal

awplus#

router bgp 10

awplus(config)#

neighbor 10.10.0.72 override-capability

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 10.10.0.72

override-capability

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.137

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.10.72 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.10.72 peer-group group1

neighbor group1 override-capability

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor group1 override-capability

awplus(config-router)#

Examples [BGP4+]

configure terminal

router bgp 12

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

override-capability

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 12

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

override-capability

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 12

awplus#

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-as

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

peer-group group1

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit

awplus(config-router-af)#

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 override-capability

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 12

no neighbor group1 override-capability

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.138

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor passive (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to configure the local BGP or BGP4+ router to be passive with regard to

the specified BGP or BGP4+ neighbor. This has the effect that the BGP or BGP4+ router will

not attempt to initiate connections to this BGP or BGP4+ neighbor, but will accept

incoming connection attempts from the BGP or BGP4+ neighbor.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this function.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] neighbor <neighborid> passive

no neighbor <neighborid> passive

Parameter

Description

<neighborid> {<ip-address>|<ipv6-addr>|<peer-group>}

<ip-address> Specify the address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor, in

dotted decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr>

Specify the address of an IPv6 BGP4+ neighbor,

entered in hexadecimal in the format X:X::X:X.

<peer-group> Enter the name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups, refer

command on page 3.159. When this parameter

is used with this command, the command

applies on all peers in the specified group.

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration for a VRF instance

Mode [BGP4+] Router Configuration

Examples [BGP]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 10.10.0.72 passive

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor 10.10.0.72 passive

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.139

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.10.72 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.10.72 peer-group group1

neighbor group1 passive

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor group1 passive

awplus(config-router)#

Examples [BGP4+]

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 passive

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 passive

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-as

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 peer-group

group1

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit

awplus(config-router-af)#

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 passive

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor group1 passive

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.140

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor password (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to enable MD5 authentication on a TCP connection between BGP and

BGP4+ neighbors. No authentication is applied by default. To setup authentication for the

session, you must first apply authentication on each connected peer for the session.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this function.

Syntax [BGP] neighbor {<ip-address>|<peer-group-name>} password <password>

no neighbor {<ip-address>|<peer-group-name>}

password [<password>]

Syntax [BGP4+] neighbor {<ipv6-addr>|<peer-group-name>} password <password>

no neighbor {<ipv6-addr>|<peer-group-name>}

password [<password>]

Parameter

Description

<ip-address>

Specifies the IP address of the BGP neighbor, in A.B.C.D

format.

<ipv6-addr>

Specifies the IPv6 address of the BGP4+ neighbor, entered in

hexadecimal in the format X:X::X:X.

<peer-group-name> Name of an existing peer-group. When this parameter is

used with this command, the command applies on all peers

in the specified group.

An alphanumeric string of characters to be used as

password.

Default No authentication is applied by default.

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration for a VRF instance

Mode [BGP4+] Router Configuration

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] When using the <peer-group-name> parameter with this command (to apply this

command to all peers in the group), see the related commands neighbor peer-group

(add a neighbor) (BGP and BGP+) and neighbor route-map (BGP and BGP4+) for

information about how to create peer groups first.

Examples [BGP] This example specifies the encryption type and the password (manager) for the neighbor

10.10.10.1:

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor 10.10.10.1 password manager

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.141

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

This example removes the password set for the neighbor 10.10.10.1:

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor 10.10.10.1 password

awplus(config-router)#

This example specifies the encryption type and the password (manager) for the neighbor

peer group named group1:

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.10.1 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.10.1 peer-group group1

neighbor group1 password manager

awplus(config-router)#

This example removes the password set for the neighbor peer group named group1:

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor group1 password

awplus(config-router)#

This example specifies the password (manager) for the neighbor peer group named

group1for an IPv4 address-family, VRF name red, and router bgp 10:

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

address-family ipv4 vrf red

neighbor 10.10.10.1 password manager

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

This example removes the password (manager) for the neighbor peer group named

group1for an IPv4 address-family, VRF name red, and router bgp 10:

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv4 vrf red

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor 10.10.10.1 password

manager

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.142

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

This example specifies the password (manager) for the neighbor peer group named

group1for an IPv4 address-family, VRF name red, and router bgp 10:

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.10.1 remote-as 10

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 10.10.10.1 peer-group

group1

address-family ipv4 vrf red

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 password manager

awplus(config-router-af)#

Examples [BGP4+] This example specifies the encryption type and the password (manager) for the neighbor

2001:0db8:010d::1:

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 password

manager

awplus(config-router)#

This example removes the password set for the neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1:

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 password

awplus(config-router)#

This example specifies the encryption type and the password (manager) for the neighbor

peer group named group1:

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-as

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 peer-group

group1

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit

awplus(config-router-af)#

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 password manager

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.143

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

This example removes the password set for the neighbor peer group named group1:

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor group1 password

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor port (BGP and BGP4+)

neighbor peer-group (add a neighbor) (BGP and

BGP+)

Use this command to add a BGP or a BGP4+ neighbor to an existing peer-group.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this function.

Syntax [BGP] neighbor <ip-address> peer-group <peer-group>

no neighbor <ip-address> peer-group <peer-group>

Syntax [BGP4+] neighbor <ipv6-addr> peer-group <peer-group>

no neighbor <ipv6-addr> peer-group <peer-group>

Parameter

Description

<ip-address> Specify the IPv4 address of the BGP neighbor, entered in the format

A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr>

Specify the IPv6 address of the BGP4+ neighbor, entered in

hexadecimal in the format X:X::X:X.

<peer-group>

Enter the name of the peer-group. When this parameter is used

with this command, the command applies on all peers in the

specified group.

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration for a VRF instance

Mode [BGP4+] IPv6 Address Family Configuration

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] Use this command to add neighbors with the same update policies to a peer group. This

facilitates the updates of various policies, such as, distribute and filter lists. The peer-group

is then configured easily with many of the neighbor commands. Any changes made to the

peer group affect all members.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.144

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

To create a peer-group use the neighbor port (BGP and BGP4+) command on page

3.147 and then use this command to add neighbors to the group.

Examples [BGP] This example shows a new peer-group group1and the addition of a neighbor

10.10.0.63to the group.

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.0.63 peer-group group1

awplus(config-router)#

This example shows a new peer-group group1and the removal of a neighbor

10.10.0.63to the group.

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor group1 peer-group

no neighbor 10.10.0.63 peer-group group1

awplus(config-router)#

Examples [BGP4+] This example shows a new peer-group group1and the addition of a neighbor

2001:0db8:010d::1to the group.

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

peer-group group1

This example shows a new peer-group group1and the removal of a neighbor

2001:0db8:010d::1to the group.

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

peer-group group1

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.145

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor peer-group (create a peer-group) (BGP and

BGP4+)

Use this command to create a peer-group for BGP and BGP4+.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this function.

Syntax neighbor <peer-group> peer-group

[BGP/BGP4+]

no neighbor <peer-group> peer-group

Parameter

Description

<peer-group> Enter the name of the peer-group.

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration for a VRF instance

Mode [BGP4+] Router Configuration

Usage Neighbors with the same update policies are grouped into peer groups. This facilitates the

[BGP/BGP4+]

updates of various policies, such as, distribute and filter lists.

The peer-group is then configured easily with many of the neighbor commands. Any

changes made to the peer group affect all members.

Use this command to create a peer-group, then use the neighbor peer-group (add a

neighbor) (BGP and BGP+) command on page 3.144 to add neighbors to the group.

Examples

[BGP/BGP4+]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor group1 peer-group

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.146

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor port (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to specify the TCP port to which packets are sent to on a BGP or a

BGP4+ neighbor. TCP port 179 is the default port used to connect BGP and BGP4+ peers.

You can specify a different destination port for the TCP session with this command.

Use the no variant of this command to reset the port number back to the default value

(TCP port 179).

Syntax [BGP] neighbor <neighborid> port <portnum>

no neighbor <neighborid> port [<portnum>]

Parameter

Description

<neighborid> {<ip-address>|ipv6-addr>|<peer-group>}

<ip-address> Specify the address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor, in

dotted decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr>

Specify the address of an IPv6 BGP4+

neighbor, entered in hexadecimal in the

format X:X::X:X.

<peer-group> Enter the name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups,

refer to the neighbor peer-group (add a

this parameter is used with this command, the

command applies on all peers in the specified

group.

<0-65535> Specifies the TCP port number.

Default TCP port 179 is the default port used to connect BGP and BGP4+ peers.

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration for a VRF instance

Mode [BGP4+] Router Configuration

Examples [BGP]

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 12

neighbor 10.10.10.10 port 643

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 12

no neighbor 10.10.10.10 port 643

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.147

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 12

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.10.1 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.10.1 peer-group group1

neighbor group1 port 643

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 12

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor group1 port 643

awplus(config-router)#

Examples [BGP4+]

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 12

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 port 643

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 12

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 port 643

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 12

awplus#

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-as

address-family ipv6

awplus(awplus-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 peer-group

group1

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit

awplus(config-router-af)#

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 port 643

configure terminal

router bgp 12

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor group1 port 643

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.148

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor prefix-list (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to distribute BGP and BGP4+ neighbor information as specified in a

prefix list.

Use the no variant of this command to remove an entry.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] neighbor <neighborid> prefix-list <listname> {in|out}

no neighbor <neighborid> prefix-list <listname> {in|out}

Parameter

Description

<neighborid> {<ip-address>|<ipv6-addr>|<peer-group>}

<ip-address> Specify the address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor, in

dotted decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr>

Specify the address of an IPv6 BGP4+ neighbor,

entered in hexadecimal in the format X:X::X:X.

<peer-group> Enter the name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups, refer

neighbor peer-group (add a neighbor) (BGP and BGP+)

command on page 3.159. When this parameter

is used with this command, the command

applies on all peers in the specified group.

The name of an IP prefix list.

Specifies that the IP prefix list applies to incoming advertisements.

Specifies that the IP prefix list applies to outgoing advertisements.

out

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration for a VRF instance

Mode [BGP4+] IPv6 Address Family Configuration

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] Use this command to specify a prefix list for filtering BGP or BGP4+ advertisements.

Filtering by prefix list matches the prefixes of routes with those listed in the prefix list. If

there is a match, the route is used. An empty prefix list permits all prefixes. If a given prefix

does not match any entries of a prefix list, the route is denied access.

The router begins the search at the top of the prefix list, with the sequence number 1.

Once a match or deny occurs, the router does not need to go through the rest of the prefix

list. For efficiency the most common matches or denies are listed at the top.

The neighbor distribute-list command is an alternative to the neighbor prefix-list

command and only one of them can be used for filtering to the same neighbor in any

direction.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.149

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP]

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

ip prefix-list list1 deny 30.0.0.0/24

router bgp 10

awplus(config)#

neighbor 10.10.10.1 prefix-list list1 in

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 10.10.10.1 prefix-list list1

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

ip prefix-list list1 deny 30.0.0.0/24

router bgp 10

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv4

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 10.10.10.1 prefix-list list1

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv4

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor 10.10.10.1 prefix-list

list1 in

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

ip prefix-list list1 deny 30.0.0.0/24

router bgp 10

awplus(config)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.10.1 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.10.1 peer-group group1

neighbor group1 prefix-list list1 in

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor group1 prefix-list list1 in

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.150

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP4+]

configure terminal

awplus#

ipv6 prefix-list list1 deny

2001:0db8:010d::1/128

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

address-family ipv6

neighbor 2001:0db8:: prefix-list

list1 in

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor 2001:0db8:: prefix-list

list1 in

configure terminal

awplus#

ip prefix-list list1 deny

2001:0db8:010d::1/128

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-as

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 peer-group

group1

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor group1 prefix-list list1 in

awplus(config-router-af)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor group1 prefix-list list1

Related Commands ip prefix-list (IPv4 Prefix List)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.151

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor remote-as (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to configure an internal or external BGP or BGP4+ (iBGP or eBGP)

peering relationship with another router.

Use the no variant of this command to remove a previously configured BGP or BGP4+

peering relationship.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] neighbor <neighborid> remote-as <as-number>

no neighbor <neighborid> remote-as <as-number>

Syntax [VRF] neighbor <neighborid> remote-as <as-number> [global|vrf <vrf-name>]

no neighbor <neighborid> remote-as <as-number>

Parameter

Description

<neighborid> {<ip-address>|ipv6-addr>|<peer-group>}

<ip-address> Specify the address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor,

in dotted decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr>

Specify the address of an IPv6 BGP4+

neighbor, entered in hexadecimal in the

format X:X::X:X.

<peer-group> Enter the name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups,

refer to the neighbor peer-group (add a

this parameter is used with this command, the

command applies on all peers in the specified

group.

<as-number>

<1-4294967295>Neighbor’s Autonomous System (AS)

number.

Specify that the remote neighbor exists locally within the device, in

the global routing domain

global

vrf

Specify that the remote neighbor exists locally within the device, in

the specified VRF instance.

<vrf-name>

The name of the VRF instance.

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration for a VRF instance

Mode [BGP4+] Router Configuration

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.152

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] This command is used to configure iBGP and eBGP peering relationships with other BGP

or BGP4+ neighbors. A peer-group support of this command is configured only after

creating a specific peer-group. Use the no variant of this command to remove a previously

configured BGP peering relationship.

The vrf and global parameters are used to create internal 'loopback' BGP connections

within the device between two VRF instances. This is used to leak BGP routes between a

named VRF instance and the global routing instance. This requires BGP neighbors to be

configured in both the global routing instance and in the named VRF instance.

Examples [BGP] To configure a BGP peering relationship from the neighbor with the IPv4 address

10.10.0.73with another router:

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor 10.10.0.73 remote-as 10

awplus(config-router)#

To remove a configured BGP peering relationship from the neighbor with the IPv4 address

10.10.0.73from another router:

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor 10.10.0.73 remote-as 10

awplus(config-router)#

To configure a BGP peering relationship from the neighbor with the peer group named

group1with another router:

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.10.1 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.10.1 peer-group group1

neighbor group1 remote-as 10

awplus(config-router)#

To remove a configured BGP peering relationship from the neighbor with the peer group

named group1with another router:

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor group1 remote-as 10

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.153

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP4+] To configure a BGP4+ peering relationship with another router:

configure terminal

router bgp 11

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-

as 345

awplus(config-router)#

To remove a configured BGP4+ peering relationship from another router:

configure terminal

router bgp 11

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

remote-as 345

awplus(config-router)#

To configure a BGP4+ peering relationship from the neighbor with the peer group named

group1with another router:

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-as

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 peer-group

group1

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit

awplus(config-router-af)#

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 remote-as 10

To remove a configured BGP4+ peering relationship from the neighbor with the peer

group named group1with another router:

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor group1 remote-as 10

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.154

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor remove-private-AS (BGP)

Use this command to remove the private Autonomous System (AS) number from external

outbound updates. Use the no variant of this command to revert to the default (disabled).

Syntax neighbor <neighborid> remove-private-AS

no neighbor <neighborid> remove-private-AS

Parameter

Description

<neighborid> {<ip-address>|<tag>}

<ip-address> The address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor, in dotted

decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<tag>

Name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups, refer

command on page 3.152. When this parameter

is used with a command, the command applies

on all peers in the specified group.

Default This command is disabled by default.

Mode BGP Router Configuration or BGP Router Address Family Configuration for a VRF instance

Usage The private AS numbers range from <64512-65535>. Private AS numbers are not

advertised to the Internet. This command is used with external BGP peers only. The router

removes the AS numbers only if the update includes private AS numbers. If the update

includes both private and public AS numbers, the system treats it as an error.

This command removes private AS numbers for BGP in Router Configuration mode. This

command is not supported for BGP4+ in IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode. This

command removes a private AS number and makes an update packet with a public AS

number as the AS path attribute. So only public AS numbers are entered in Internet BGP

routing tables, and private AS numbers are not entered in Internet BGP tables.

For the filtering to apply, both peering devices must be set to use either 2-byte or

extended 4- byte ASN (with the same ASN type set on both peers). For example, if a device

(which defaults to use a 4-byte ASN), is peered with a device that defaults to a 2-byte ASN,

then the device using a 2-byte ASN device also needs to be configured with the command

bgp extended-asn-cap for the filtering to apply.

See the How to remove private AS numbers for BGP section in the BGP and BGP4+

Introduction chapter for further information about removing private AS numbers.

Examples

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor 10.10.0.63 remove-private-AS

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.155

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor 10.10.0.63 remove-private-AS

awplus(config-router)#

Related Commands show ip bgp (BGP)

neighbor restart-time (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to set a different restart-time other than the global restart-time

configured using the bgp graceful-restart command for BGP and BGP4+.

Use the no variant of this command to restore the device to its default state (see the

default value of the bgp graceful-restart command).

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] neighbor <neighborid> restart-time <delay-value>

no neighbor <neighborid> restart-time <delay-value>

Parameter

Description

<neighborid> {<ip-address>|<ipv6-addr>|<peer-group>}

<ip-address> Specify the address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor, in

dotted decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr>

Specify the address of an IPv6 BGP4+ neighbor,

entered in hexadecimal in the format X:X::X:X.

<peer-group> Enter the name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups,

refer to the neighbor peer-group (add a

neighbor peer-group (add a neighbor) (BGP and BGP+)

this parameter is used with this command, the

command applies on all peers in the specified

group.

<delay-value> <1-3600>

Delay value in seconds.

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration for a VRF instance

Mode [BGP4+] Router Configuration

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] This command takes precedence over the restart-time value specified using the bgp

graceful-restart command.

The restart-time value is the maximum time that a graceful-restart neighbor waits to come

back up after a restart. The default is 120 seconds.

Make sure that the restart time specified using this command does not exceed the

stalepath-time specified in the Router Configuration mode.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.156

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 10.10.10.1 restart-time 45

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor 10.10.10.1 restart-time 45

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.10.1 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.10.1 peer-group group1

neighbor group1 restart-time 45

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor group1 restart-time 45

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.157

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP4+]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

restart-time 45

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

restart-time 45

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-as

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 peer-group

group1

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit

awplus(config-router-af)#

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 restart-time 45

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor group1 restart-time 45

awplus(config-router)#

Related Commands bgp graceful-restart (BGP and BGP4+)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.158

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor route-map (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to apply a route map to incoming or outgoing routes for BGP or BGP4+.

Use the no variant of this command to remove a route map from a BGP or BGP4+ route.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] neighbor <neighborid> route-map <mapname> {in|out}

no neighbor <neighborid> route-map <mapname> {in|out}

Parameter

Description

<neighborid> {<ip-address>|ipv6-addr>|<peer-group>}

<ip-address> Specify the address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor, in

dotted decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr>

Specify the address of an IPv6 BGP4+ neighbor,

entered in hexadecimal in the format X:X::X:X.

<peer-group> Enter the name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups, refer

neighbor peer-group (add a neighbor) (BGP and BGP+)

command on page 3.159. When this parameter

is used with this command, the command

applies on all peers in the specified group.

Specifies name of the route-map.

Specifies that the access list applies to incoming advertisements.

Specifies that the access list applies to outgoing advertisements.

out

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration for a VRF instance

Mode [BGP4+] IPv6 Address Family Configuration

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] Use the neighbor route-map command to filter updates and modify attributes. A route

map is applied to inbound or outbound updates. Only the routes that pass the route map

are sent or accepted in updates.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.159

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP] The following example shows the configuration of the route-map name rmap2 and then

the use of this map name in the neighbor route-map command for the neighbor with the

IPv4 address 10.10.10.1in the Router Configuration mode.

configure terminal

route-map rmap2 permit 6

match origin incomplete

set metric 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-route-map)#

awplus(config)#

exit

router bgp 10

neighbor 10.10.10.1 route-map rmap2

awplus(config-router)#

The following example shows the removal of the route-map name rmap2 in the neighbor

route-map command for the neighbor with the IPv4 address 10.10.10.1in the Router

Configuration mode.

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 10.10.10.1 route-map

rmap2 in

awplus(config-router)#

The following example shows the configuration of the route-map name rmap2 and then

the use of this map name in the neighbor route-map command for the neighbor with the

IPv4 address 10.10.10.1in the IPv4 Address Family Configuration mode.

configure terminal

route-map rmap2 permit 6

match origin incomplete

set metric 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-route-map)#

awplus(config)#

exit

router bgp 10

address-family ipv4

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 10.10.10.1 route-map rmap2

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.160

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

The following example shows the removal of the route-map name rmap2 in the neighbor

route-map command for the neighbor with the IPv4 address 10.10.10.1in the IPv4

Address Family Configuration mode.

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv4

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor 10.10.10.1 route-map

rmap2 in

The following example shows the configuration of the route-map name rmap2 and then

the use of this map name in the neighbor route-map command for the neighbor with the

peer group named group1in the Router Configuration mode.

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

route-map rmap2 permit 6

match origin incomplete

set metric 100

awplus(config-route-map)#

awplus(config)#

exit

router bgp 10

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.10.1 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.10.1 peer-group group1

neighbor group1 route-map rmap2 in

awplus(config-router)#

The following example shows the removal the route-map name rmap2 in the neighbor

route-map command for the neighbor with the peer group named group1in the Router

Configuration mode.

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor group1 route-map rmap2 in

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.161

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP4+] The following example shows the configuration of the route-map name rmap2 and then

the use of this map name in the neighbor route-map command for the neighbor with the

IPv6 address 2001:0db8:010d::1in the IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode.

configure terminal

route-map rmap2 permit 6

match origin incomplete

set metric 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-route-map)#

awplus(config)#

exit

router bgp 10

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 route-map

rmap2 in

The following example shows the removal of the route-map name rmap2 in the neighbor

route-map command for the neighbor with the IPv6 address 2001:0db8:010d::1in

the IPv6 Address Family Configuration mode.

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 route-

map rmap2 in

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.162

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

The following example shows the configuration of the route-map name rmap2 and then

the use of this map name in the neighbor route-map command for the neighbor with the

peer group named group1in the Router Configuration mode.

configure terminal

route-map rmap2 permit 6

match origin incomplete

set metric 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-route-map)#

awplus(config)#

exit

router bgp 10

neighbor group1 peer-group

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-as

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 peer-group

group1

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor group1 route-map rmap2 in

awplus(config-router-af)#

The following example shows the removal the route-map name rmap2 in the neighbor

route-map command for the neighbor with the peer group named group1in the Router

Configuration mode.

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor group1 route-map rmap2 in

Related Commands address-family (BGP and BGP4+)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.163

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor route-reflector-client (BGP)

Use this command to configure the router as a BGP route reflector and configure the

specified neighbor as its client.

Use the no variant of this command to indicate that the neighbor is not a client.

Syntax neighbor <neighborid> route-reflector-client

no neighbor <neighborid> route-reflector-client

Parameter

Description

<neighborid> {<ip-address>|<peer-group>}

<ip-address> The address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor, in dotted

decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<peer-group> Enter the name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups, refer

command on page 3.159. When this parameter

is used with this command, the command

applies on all peers in the specified group.

Mode Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration for a VRF instance

Usage Route reflectors are a solution for the explosion of iBGP peering within an autonomous

system. By route reflection the number of iBGP peers within an AS is reduced. Use the

neighbor route-reflector-client command to configure the local router as the route

reflector and specify neighbors as its client.

An AS can have more than one route reflector. One route reflector treats the other route

reflector as another iBGP speaker.

In the following configuration, Router1 is the route reflector for clients 3.3.3.3and

2.2.2.2; it also has a non-client peer 6.6.6.6:

Router1#

router bgp 200

neighbor 3.3.3.3 remote-as 200

neighbor 3.3.3.3 route-reflector-client

neighbor 2.2.2.2 remote-as 200

neighbor 2.2.2.2 route-reflector-client

neighbor 6.6.6.6 remote-as 200

Examples

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 10.10.0.72

awplus(config-router)#

route-reflector-client

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.164

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 10.10.0.72

route-reflector-client

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor route-server-client (BGP)

Use this command to specify the peer as route server client.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this function.

Syntax neighbor <neighborid> route-server-client

no neighbor <neighborid> route-server-client

Parameter

Description

<neighborid> {<ip-address>|<peer-group>}

<ip-address> The address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor, in dotted

decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<peer-group> Enter the name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups,

refer to the neighbor peer-group (add a

this parameter is used with this command, the

command applies on all peers in the specified

group.

Mode Router Configuration

Examples

configure terminal

awplus#

router bgp 10

awplus(config)#

neighbor 10.10.0.72 route-server-client

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 10.10.0.72

route-server-client

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.165

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor send-community (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to specify that a community attribute should be sent to a BGP or

BGP4+ neighbor.

Use the no variant of this command to remove the entry for the community attribute.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] neighbor <neighborid> send-community {both|extended|standard}

no neighbor <neighborid> send-community {both|extended|standard}

Parameter

Description

<neighborid> {<ip-address>|<ipv6-addr>|<peer-group>}

<ip-address> Specify the address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor, in

dotted decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr>

Specify the address of an IPv6 BGP4+ neighbor,

entered in hexadecimal in the format X:X::X:X.

<peer-group> Enter the name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups, refer

neighbor peer-group (add a neighbor) (BGP and BGP+)

command on page 3.159. When this parameter

is used with this command, the command

applies on all peers in the specified group.

both

Sends Standard and Extended Community attributes. Specifying

this parameter with the no variant of this command results in no

standardor extendedcommunity attributes being sent.

extended

standard

Sends Extended Community attributes. Specifying this parameter

with the no variant of this command results in no extended

community attributes being sent.

Sends Standard Community attributes. Specifying this parameter

with the no variant of this command results in no standard

community attributes being sent.

Default [BGP/BGP4+] Both standard and extended community attributes are sent to a neighbor.

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration for a VRF instance

Mode [BGP4+] Router Configuration and IPv6 Address Family Configuration

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] This command is used to specify a community attribute to be sent to a neighbor. The

community attribute groups destinations in a certain community and applies routing

decisions according to those communities. On receiving community attributes the router

reannounces them to the neighbor. Only when the no parameter is used with this

command the community attributes are not reannounced to the neighbor.

By default, both standard and extended community attributes are sent to a neighbor.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.166

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP]

configure terminal

bgp config-type standard

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 10.10.0.72 send-community

extended

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

bgp config-type standard

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 10.10.0.72 send-community

extended

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

bgp config-type standard

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv4

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 10.10.0.72 send-community

extended

configure terminal

bgp config-type standard

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv4

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor 10.10.0.72 send-community

extended

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

bgp config-type standard

router bgp 10

awplus(config)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.10.1 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.10.1 peer-group group1

neighbor group1 send-community extended

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.167

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP4+]

configure terminal

bgp config-type standard

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

send-community extended

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

bgp config-type standard

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

send-community extended

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

bgp config-type standard

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

send-community extended

configure terminal

bgp config-type standard

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

send-community extended

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.168

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

configure terminal

bgp config-type standard

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-as

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 peer-group

group1

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit

awplus(config-router-af)#

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 send-community

extended

configure terminal

bgp config-type standard

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor group1 send-community

extended

awplus(config-router)#

Related Commands bgp config-type (BGP and BGP4+)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.169

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor shutdown (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to disable a peering relationship with a BGP or BGP4+ neighbor.

Use the no variant of this command to re-enable the BGP or BGP4+ neighbor.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] neighbor <neighborid> shutdown

no neighbor <neighborid> shutdown

Parameter

Description

<neighborid> {<ip-address>|<peer-group>}

<ip-address> Specify the address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor, in

dotted decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr>

Specify the address of an IPv6 BGP4+ neighbor,

entered in hexadecimal in the format X:X::X:X.

<peer-group> Enter the name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups, refer

command on page 3.159. When this parameter

is used with this command, the command

applies on all peers in the specified group.

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration for a VRF instance

Mode [BGP4+] Router Configuration

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] This command shuts down any active session for the specified BGP or BGP4+ neighbor

and clears all related routing data.

Examples [BGP]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 10.10.0.72 shutdown

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor 10.10.0.72 shutdown

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor group1 shutdown

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.170

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor group1 shutdown

awplus(config-router)#

Examples [BGP4+]

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 shutdown

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

shutdown

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor group1 shutdown

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor group1 shutdown

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.171

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor soft-reconfiguration inbound (BGP and

BGP4+)

Use this command to configure the switch to start storing all updates from the BGP or

BGP4+ neighbor, without any consideration of any inward route filtering policy that might

be applied to the connection with this BGP or BGP4+ neighbor. This is so that the full set of

the neighbor’s updates are available locally to be used in a soft-reconfiguration event.

You may need to apply this older method of clearing routes if the peer does not support

route refresh.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this function for a BGP or BGP4+ neighbor.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] neighbor <neighborid> soft-reconfiguration inbound

no neighbor <neighborid> soft-reconfiguration inbound

Parameter

Description

<neighborid> {<ip-address>|<ipv6-addr>|<peer-group>}

<ip-address> Specify the address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor, in

dotted decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr>

Specify the address of an IPv6 BGP4+ neighbor,

entered in hexadecimal in the format X:X::X:X.

<peer-group> Enter the name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups, refer

command on page 3.159. When this parameter

is used with this command, the command

applies on all peers in the specified group.

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration for a VRF instance

Mode [BGP4+] IPv6 Address Family Configuration

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] Use this command to store updates for inbound soft reconfiguration. Soft-reconfiguration

may be used in lieu of BGP route refresh capability. Using this command enables local

storage of all the received routes and their attributes. This requires additional memory.

When a soft reset (inbound) is done on this neighbor, the locally stored routes are re-

processed according to the inbound policy. The BGP neighbor connection is not affected.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.172

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP]

configure terminal

router bgp 12

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 10.10.10.10

awplus(config-router)#

soft-reconfiguration inbound

configure terminal

router bgp 12

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 10.10.10.10

awplus(config-router)#

soft-reconfiguration inbound

configure terminal

router bgp 12

awplus#

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

address-family ipv4

neighbor 10.10.10.10

soft-reconfiguration inbound

configure terminal

router bgp 12

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv4

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor 10.10.10.10

soft-reconfiguration inbound

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.10.1 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.10.1 peer-group group1

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 soft-reconfiguration

inbound

configure terminal

router bgp 12

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor group1 soft-reconfiguration

inbound

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.173

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP4+]

configure terminal

router bgp 12

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

soft-reconfiguration inbound

configure terminal

router bgp 12

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

soft-reconfiguration inbound

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-as

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 peer-group

group1

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor group1 soft-reconfiguration

inbound

awplus(config-router-af)#

configure terminal

router bgp 12

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

no neighbor group1

soft-reconfiguration inbound

awplus(config-router-

af)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.174

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor timers (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to set the keepalive, holdtime, and connect timers for a specific BGP or

BGP4+ neighbor.

Use the no variant of this command to clear the timers for a specific BGP or BGP4+

neighbor.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] neighbor <neighborid> timers

{<keepalive> <holdtime>|connect <connect>}

no neighbor <neighborid> timers [connect]

Parameter

Description

<neighborid> {<ip-address>|<ipv6-addr>|<peer-group>}

<ip-address> Specify the address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor, in

dotted decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr>

Specify the address of an IPv6 BGP4+ neighbor,

entered in hexadecimal in the format X:X::X:X.

<peer-group> Enter the name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups, refer

command on page 3.159. When this parameter

is used with this command, the command

applies on all peers in the specified group.

<keepalive> <0-65535>Frequency (in seconds) at which a router sends

keepalive messages to its neighbor. The default is 30 seconds as per

RFC 4271. The default Cisco IOS keepalive timer is 60 seconds.

<0-65535>Interval (in seconds) after which, on not receiving a

keepalive message, the router declares a neighbor dead. The default

is 90 seconds as per RFC 4271. The default Cisco IOS keepalive timer

is 180 seconds. Modify this value as needed for interoperability.

connect <1-65535>Specifies the connect timer in seconds. The

default connect timer value is 120 seconds as per RFC 4271. Modify

this value as needed for interoperability.

Default The keepalive timer default is 60 seconds, the holdtime timer default is 90 seconds, and

the connect timer default is 120 seconds as per RFC 4271. Holdtime is keepalive * 3.

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration for a VRF instance

Mode [BGP4+] Router Configuration

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] Keepalive messages are sent by a router to inform another router that the BGP connection

between the two is still active. The keepalive interval is the period of time between each

keepalive message sent by the router. The holdtime interval is the time the router waits to

receive a keepalive message and if it does not receive a message for this period it declares

the neighbor dead. The holdtime value must be 3 times the value of the keepalive value.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.175

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP]

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor 10.10.10.1 timers 60 120

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor 10.10.10.1 timers

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.10.1 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.10.1 peer-group group1

neighbor group1 timers 60 120

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor group1 timers

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.176

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP4+]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 timers 60

120

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 timers

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-as

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 peer-group

group1

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit

awplus(config-router-af)#

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 timers 60 120

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor group1 timers

awplus(config-router)#

show ip bgp neighbors hold-time (BGP)

show ip bgp neighbors keepalive-interval (BGP)

timers (BGP and BGP4+)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.177

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor transparent-as (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to specify not to append your AS path number even if the BGP or

BGP4+ peer is an eBGP peer.

Note this command has the same effect as invoking neighbor attribute-unchanged

(BGP and BGP4+) and specifying the optional as-path parameter.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] neighbor <neighborid> transparent-as

Parameter Description

<neighborid> {<ip-address>|<ipv6-addr>|<peer-group>}

<ip-address> Specify the address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor, in

dotted decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr>

Specify the address of an IPv6 BGP4+ neighbor,

entered in hexadecimal in the format X:X::X:X.

<peer-group> Enter the name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups, refer

neighbor peer-group (add a neighbor) (BGP and BGP+)

command on page 3.159. When this parameter

is used with this command, the command

applies on all peers in the specified group.

Mode [BGP/BGP4+] Router Configuration

Examples [BGP]

configure terminal

awplus#

router bgp 10

awplus(config)#

neighbor 10.10.10.1 transparent-as

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.10.1 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.10.1 peer-group group1

neighbor group1 transparent-as

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.178

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP4+]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

transparent-as

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-as

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 peer-group

group1

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit

awplus(config-router-af)#

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 transparent-as

neighbor transparent-nexthop (BGP and BGP4+)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.179

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor transparent-nexthop (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to keep the nexthop value of the route even if the BGP or BGP4+ peer is

an eBGP peer.

Note this command has the same effect as invoking neighbor attribute-unchanged

(BGP and BGP4+) and specifying the optional next-hop parameter.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] neighbor <neighborid> transparent-nexthop

Parameter Description

<neighborid> {<ip-address>|<ipv6-addr>|<peer-group>}

<ip-address> Specify the address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor, in

dotted decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr>

Specify the address of an IPv6 BGP4+ neighbor,

entered in hexadecimal in the format X:X::X:X.

<peer-group> Enter the name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups, refer

neighbor peer-group (add a neighbor) (BGP and BGP+)

command on page 3.159. When this parameter

is used with this command, the command

applies on all peers in the specified group.

Mode [BGP/BGP4+] Router Configuration

Examples [BGP]

configure terminal

awplus#

router bgp 10

awplus(config)#

neighbor 10.10.10.1 transparent-nexthop

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.10.1 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.10.1 peer-group group1

neighbor group1 transparent-nexthop

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.180

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP4+]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

transparent-nexthop

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-as

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 peer-group

group1

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit

awplus(config-router-af)#

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 transparent-nexthop

neighbor transparent-as (BGP and BGP4+)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.181

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor unsuppress-map (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to selectively leak more specific routes to a particular BGP or BGP4+

neighbor.

Use the no variant of this command to remove selectively leaked specific routes to a

particular BGP or BGP4+ neighbor.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] neighbor <neighborid> unsuppress-map <route-map-name>

no neighbor <neighborid> unsuppress-map <route-map-name>

Parameter

Description

{<ip-address>|<ipv6-addr>|<peer-group>}

<ip-address> Specify the address of an IPv4 BGP

neighbor, in dotted decimal notation

A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr>

Specify the address of an IPv6 BGP4+

neighbor, entered in hexadecimal in the

format X:X::X:X.

<peer-group> Enter the name of an existing peer-

group. For information on how to create

peer groups, refer to the neighbor peer-

group (add a neighbor) (BGP and

BGP+) command on page 3.144, and

neighbor peer-group (add a neighbor) (BGP and BGP+)

command on page 3.159. When this

parameter is used with this command,

the command applies on all peers in the

specified group.

<route-map-name> The name of the route-map used to select routes to be

unsuppressed.

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration or Address-Family Configuration for IPv4 unicast or for a VRF

instance

Mode [BGP4+] IPv6 Address Family Configuration

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] When the aggregate-address (BGP and BGP4+) command is used with the summary-

only option, the more-specific routes of the aggregate are suppressed to all neighbors.

Use this command instead to selectively leak more-specific routes to a particular

neighbor.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.182

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 10.10.0.73 unsuppress-map

mymap

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv4 unicast

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 10.10.0.70 unsuppress-map

mymap

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 10.10.0.73 unsuppress-map

mymap

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv4 unicast

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor 10.10.0.70 unsuppress-map

mymap

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.10.1 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.10.1 peer-group group1

neighbor group1 unsuppress-map mymap

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor group1 unsuppress-map

mymap

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.183

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP4+]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6 unicast

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

unsuppress-map mymap

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6 unicast

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

unsuppress-map mymap

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-as

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 peer-group

group1

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor group1 unsuppress-map mymap

awplus(config-router-af)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor group1 unsuppress-map

mymap

Related Commands aggregate-address (BGP and BGP4+)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.184

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor update-source (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to specify the source IPv4 or IPv6 address of BGP or BGP4+ packets,

which are sent to the neighbor for routing updates, as the IPv4 or IPv6 address configured

on the specified interface. The specified interface is usually the local loopback (lo)

interface to allow internal BGP or BGP4+ connections to stay up regardless of which

interface is used to reach a neighbor.

Use the no variant of this command to remove the IPv4 or IPv6 address from the interface

as the source IPv4 or IPv6 address of BGP or BGP4+ packets sent to the neighbor, and

restores the interface assignment to the closest interface, which is also called the best

local address.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] neighbor <neighborid> update-source <interface>

no neighbor <neighborid> update-source

Parameter

Description

<neighborid> {<ip-address>|<ipv6-addr>|<peer-group>}

<ip-address> Specify the address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor, in

dotted decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr>

Specify the address of an IPv6 BGP4+ neighbor,

entered in hexadecimal in the format X:X::X:X.

<peer-group> Enter the name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups, refer

command on page 3.159. When this parameter

is used with this command, the command

applies on all peers in the specified group.

Specifies the local loopback interface (lo).

Default [BGP/BGP4+] Use of this command sets a default value of 2 for the maximum hop count.

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration for a VRF instance

Mode [BGP4+] Router Configuration

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] Use this command in conjunction with any specified interface on the router. The local

loopback interface is the interface that is most commonly used with this command. The

use of local loopback interface eliminates a dependency and BGP or BGP4+ does not have

to rely on the availability of a particular interface for making BGP or BGP4+ peer

relationships.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.185

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP] To source BGP connections for neighbor 10.10.0.72with the IP address of the local

loopback address instead of the best local address, enter the commands listed below:

interface lo

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-if)#

ip address 10.10.0.73/24

exit

awplus(config-if)#

router bgp 100

awplus(config)#

network 10.10.0.0

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 10.10.0.72 remote-as 110

neighbor 10.10.0.72 update-source lo

To remove BGP connections for neighbor 10.10.0.72with the IP address of the local

loopback address instead of the best local address, enter the commands listed below:

router bgp 100

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 10.10.0.72 update-source

awplus(config-router)#

To source BGP connections for neighbor group1with the IP address of the local

loopback address instead of the best local address, enter the commands listed below:

interface lo

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-if)#

ip address 10.10.0.73/24

exit

awplus(config-if)#

router bgp 100

awplus(config)#

network 10.10.0.0

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.0.72 remote-as 100

neighbor 10.10.0.72 peer-group group1

neighbor group1 update-source lo

To remove BGP connections for neighbor group1with the IP address of the local

loopback address instead of the best local address, enter the commands listed below:

router bgp 100

awplus(config)#

neighbor group1 update-source lo

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.186

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP4+] To source BGP connections for neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1with the IPv6 address of

the local loopback address instead of the best local address, enter the commands listed

below:

interface lo

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-if)#

awplus(config)#

ipv6 address 2001:0db8:010d::1/128

exit

router bgp 100

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-as

110

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

update-source lo

awplus(config-router)#

To remove BGP connections for neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1with the IPv6 address

of the local loopback address instead of the best local address, enter the commands listed

below:

router bgp 100

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1

update-source

awplus(config-router)#

To source BGP connections for neighbor group1with the IPv6 address of the local

loopback address instead of the best local address, enter the commands listed below:

interface lo

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-if)#

awplus(config)#

ipv6 address 2001:0db8:010d::1/128

exit

router bgp 100

neighbor group1 peer-group

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-as

100

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 peer-group

group1

awplus(config-router-af)#

exit

awplus(config-router-af)#

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor group1 update-source lo

To remove BGP connections for neighbor group1with the IPv6 address of the local

loopback address instead of the best local address, enter the commands listed below:

router bgp 100

awplus(config)#

neighbor group1 update-source lo

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.187

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor version (BGP)

Use this command to configure the switch to accept only a particular BGP version.

Use the no variant of this command to use the default BGP version (version 4).

Syntax neighbor <neighborid> version <version>

no neighbor <neighborid> version

Parameter

Description

<neighborid> {<ip-address>|<peer-group>}

<ip-address> The address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor, in dotted

decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<peer-group> Enter the name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups,

refer to the neighbor peer-group (add a

this parameter is used with this command, the

command applies on all peers in the specified

group.

{4} Specifies the BGP version number.

Mode Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration for a VRF instance

Usage By default, the system uses BGP version 4 and on request dynamically negotiates down to

version 2. Using this command disables the router’s version-negotiation capability and

forces the router to use only a specified version with the neighbor.

Examples

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor 10.10.10.1 version 4

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.10.1 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.10.1 peer-group group1

neighbor group1 version 4

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.188

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor 10.10.10.1 version

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor group1 version

awplus(config-router)#

the neighbor peer-group (add a neighbor)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.189

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

neighbor weight (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to set default weights for routes from this BGP or BGP4+ neighbor.

Use the no variant of this command to remove a weight assignment.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] neighbor <neighborid> weight <weight>

no neighbor <neighborid> weight [<weight>]

Parameter

Description

<neighborid> {<ip-address>|<ipv6-addr>|<peer-group>}

<ip-address>

Specify the address of an IPv4 BGP neighbor, in

dotted decimal notation A.B.C.D.

<ipv6-addr> Specify the address of an IPv6 BGP4+ neighbor,

entered in hexadecimal in the format X:X::X:X.

<peer-

group>

Enter the name of an existing peer-group. For

information on how to create peer groups, refer to

command on page 3.159. When this parameter is

used with this command, the command applies

on all peers in the specified group.

<0-65535> Specifies the weight this command assigns to the route.

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration for a VRF instance

Mode [BGP4+] IPv6 Address Family Configuration

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] Use this command to specify a weight value to all routes learned from a BGP or BGP4+

neighbor. The route with the highest weight gets preference when there are other routes

on the network.

Unlike the local-preference attribute, the weight attribute is relevant only to the local

router.

The weights assigned using the set weight command overrides the weights assigned

using this command.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.190

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP]

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor 10.10.10.1 weight 60

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

no neighbor 10.10.10.1 weight

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv4

neighbor 10.10.10.1 weight 60

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv4

no neighbor 10.10.10.1 weight

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

neighbor group1 peer-group

neighbor 10.10.10.1 remote-as 10

neighbor 10.10.10.1 peer-group group1

neighbor group1 weight 60

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

no neighbor group1 weight

awplus(config-router)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.191

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples [BGP4+]

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 weight 60

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 10

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

no neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 weight

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

neighbor group1 peer-group

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 remote-as

address-family ipv6

awplus(config-router)#

neighbor 2001:0db8:010d::1 peer-

group group1

awplus(config-router-af)#

neighbor group1 weight 60

awplus(config-router-af)#

configure terminal

router bgp 10

awplus#

awplus(config)#

address-family ipv6

no neighbor group1 weight

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

graceful-restart (BGP and BGP4+) command on page 3.32).

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.192

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

network (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to specify particular routes to be advertised into the BGP or BGP4+

routing process. A unicast network address without a mask is accepted if it falls into the

natural boundary of its class. A class-boundary mask is derived if the address matches its

natural class-boundary.

Note that you can specify a prefix length for the prefix being added, and you can also

specify a classful network without a prefix length and an appropriate prefix length is

added. Note that specifying a non-classful prefix without a prefix length results in a /32

prefix length on an IPv4 route.

Use the no variant of this command to remove a network route entry.

Syntax [BGP] network {<ip-prefix/length>|<ip-network-addr>} [mask <network-mask>]

[route-map <route-map-name>] [backdoor]

no network {<ip-prefix/length>|<ip-network-addr>}

[mask <network-mask>][route-map <route-map-name>] [backdoor]

Syntax [BGP4+] network {<ipv6-prefix/length>|<ipv6-network-addr>}

[route-map <route-map-name>]

no network {<ipv6-prefix/length>|<ipv6-network-addr>}

[route-map <route-map-name>]

Parameter

Description

<ip-prefix/length>

IP network prefix and prefix length entered in dotted

decimal format for the IP network prefix, then slash

notation for the prefix length in the format A.B.C.D/M, e.g.

192.168.1.224/27

<ip-network-addr>

<network-mask>

IP network prefix entered in dotted decimal format

A.B.C.D, e.g. 192.168.1.224

Specify a network mask in the format A.B.C.D, e.g.

255.255.255.224.

<ipv6-prefix/

length>

IPv6 network prefix and prefix length entered in dotted

decimal format for the IPv6 network prefix, then slash

notation for the IPv6 prefix length in the format X:X::X:X/

M, e.g. 2001:db8::/64

<ipv6-network-addr> IP network prefix entered in dotted decimal format

A.B.C.D, e.g. 192.168.1.224

<route-map-name>

Specify the name of the route map.

backdoor

Specify a BGP backdoor route that is not advertised.

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration and IPv4 Address Family [ipv4 unicast]mode

Mode [BGP4+] IPv6 Address Family Configuration

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.193

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] It does not matter how the route is arranged in the IP or IPv6 routing table. The route can

arrive in the IP routing table by a static route, or the route can be learnt from OSPF or

OSPFv3 or RIP or RIPng routing.

If you configure a route-map, then that route-map will be used in filtering the network, or

the route-map will be used to modify the attributes that are advertised with the route.

Example [BGP] The following example illustrates a Class-A address configured as a network route. The

natural Class-A network prefix mask length of 8 will be internally derived, that is, 2.0.0.0/8.

router bgp 100

network 2.0.0.0

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-router)#

Output [BGP] Figure 3-1: Example output from the show running-config command after entering

network 2.0.0.0

awplus#show running-config

router bgp 100

network 2.0.0.0/8

Example [BGP] The following example illustrates a network address which does not fall into its natural

class boundary, and hence, is perceived as a host route, that is, 192.0.2.224/27.

router bgp 100

awplus(config)#

network 192.0.2.224 mask 255.255.255.224

awplus(config-router)#

Output [BGP] Figure 3-2: Example output from the show running-config command after entering

network 192.0.2.224 mask 255.255.255.224

awplus#show running-config

router bgp 100

network 192.0.2.224/27

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.194

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Example [BGP] The following example is the same as the previous example for host route 192.0.2.224/27,

but is entered in prefix/length format using slash notation (instead of prefix plus mask in

dotted decimal format using the mask keyword before the network mask in dotted

decimal format):

router bgp 100

awplus(config)#

network 192.0.2.224/27

awplus(config-router)#

Output [BGP] Figure 3-3: Example output from the show running-config command after entering

network 192.0.2.224/27

awplus#show running-config

router bgp 100

network 192.0.2.224/27

Example [BGP4+] The following example is the same as the previous example for host route 2001:db8::/32,:

router bgp 100

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

address-family ipv6

network 2001:db8::/32

Output [BGP4+] Figure 3-4: Example output from the show running-config command after entering

network 2001:db8::/32

awplus#show running-config

router bgp 100

network 2001:db8::/32

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.195

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

network synchronization (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to ensure the exact same static network prefix, specified through any

of the network commands, is local or has IGP reachability before introduction to BGP or

BGP4+.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this function.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] network synchronization

no network synchronization

Default [BGP/BGP4+] Network synchronization is disabled by default.

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration and IPv4 Address Family [ipv4 unicast] Configuration

Mode [BGP4+] IPv6 Address Family [ipv6 unicast] Configuration

Examples [BGP] The following example enables IGP synchronization of BGP static network routes in the

Router Configuration mode.

configure terminal

router bgp 11

awplus#

awplus(config)#

network synchronization

awplus(config-router)#

The following example enables IGP synchronization of BGP static network routes in the

IPv4-Unicast address family.

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 11

address-family ipv4 unicast

network synchronization

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

Example [BGP4+] The following example enables IGP synchronization of BGP4+ static network routes in the

IPv6-Unicast address family.

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

router bgp 11

address-family ipv6 unicast

network synchronization

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.196

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

redistribute (into BGP or BGP4+) (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to inject routes from one routing process into a BGP or BGP4+ routing

table.

Use the no variant of this command to disable this function.

Syntax [BGP/BGP4+] redistribute {ospf|rip|connected|static} [route-map <route-map-entry-

pointer>]

no redistribute {ospf|rip|connected|static} [route-map <route-map-

entry-pointer>]

Parameter

Description

connected

Specifies the redistribution of connected routes

for both BGP and BGP4+.

ospf

Specifies the redistribution of OSPF information

for BGP or OSPFv3 information for BGP4+.

rip

Specifies the redistribution of RIP information for

BGP or RIPng information for BGP4+.

static

Specifies the redistribution of Static routes for

both BGP and BGP4+.

route-map

Route map reference for both BGP and BGP4+.

<route-map-entry-pointer> Pointer to route-map entries.

Mode [BGP] Router Configuration or IPv4 Address Family Configuration for a VRF instance

Mode [BGP4+] Router Configuration or IPv6 Address Family Configuration

Usage [BGP/BGP4+] Redistribution is used by routing protocols to advertise routes that are learned by some

other means, such as by another routing protocol or by static routes. Since all internal

routes are dumped into BGP, careful filtering is applied to make sure that only routes to be

advertised reach the internet, not everything. This command allows redistribution by

injecting prefixes from one routing protocol into another routing protocol.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.197

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Examples The following example shows the configuration of a route-map named rmap1, which is

[BGP/BGP+]

then applied using the redistribute route-map command.

configure terminal

route-map rmap1 permit 1

match origin incomplete

set metric 100

awplus#

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-route-map)#

awplus(config)#

exit

router bgp 12

redistribute ospf route-map rmap1

awplus(config-router)#

To apply the above example to a specific VRF instance named blue, use the following

commands:

router bgp 12

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-router)#

awplus(config-router-af)#

address-family ipv4 vrf blue

redistribute ospf route-map rmap1

The following example shows the configuration of a route-map named rmap2, which is

then applied using the redistribute route-map command.

configure terminal

route-map rmap2 permit 3

match interface vlan1

set metric-type 1

awplus#

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-route-map)#

awplus(config)#

exit

router ospf 100

redistribute bgp route-map rmap2

awplus(config-router)#

Note that configuring a route-map and applying it with the redistribute route-map

command allows you to filter which router are distributed from another routing protocol

(such as OSPF with BGP). A route-map can also set the metric, tag, and metric-type of the

redistributed routes.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.198

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

restart bgp graceful (BGP)

Use this command to force the switch to perform a graceful BGP restart.

Syntax restart bgp graceful

Mode Privileged Exec

Usage Before using this command, BGP graceful-restart capabilities must be enabled within the

router BGP (bgp graceful-restart (BGP and BGP4+) command on page 3.32), and each

neighbor configured on the device should be set to advertise its graceful-restart capability

(bgp graceful-restart graceful-reset (BGP and BGP4+) command on page 3.33). The

neighbor devices also need to have BGP graceful-restart capabilities enabled (bgp

This command stops the whole BGP process and makes the switch retain the BGP routes

and mark them as stale. Receiving BGP speakers, retain and mark as stale all BGP routes

received from the restarting speaker for all the address families received in the Graceful

Restart Capability exchange.

When a restart bgp graceful command is issued, the BGP configuration is reloaded from

the last saved configuration. Ensure you first issue a copy running-config startup-config.

Example

restart bgp graceful

awplus#

Related Commands bgp graceful-restart (BGP and BGP4+)

bgp graceful-restart graceful-reset (BGP and BGP4+)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.199

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

router bgp (BGP and BGP4+)

Use this command to configure a BGP routing process, specifying the 32-bit Autonomous

System (AS) number.

Use the no variant of this command to disable a BGP routing process, specifying the 32-bit

AS number.

Syntax router bgp <asn>

no router bgp <asn>

Parameter

Description

<asn>

<1-4294967295>Specifies the 32-bit Autonomous System (AS)

number.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage The router bgp command enables a BGP routing process:

router bgp 1

neighbor 10.0.0.1 remote-as 1

neighbor 10.0.0.2 remote-as 1

router bgp 2

neighbor 10.0.0.3 remote-as 2

neighbor 10.0.0.4 remote-as 2

Examples

configure terminal

router bgp 12

awplus#

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-router)#

configure terminal

no router bgp 12

awplus#

awplus(config)#

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.200

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

route-map (Route Map)

Use this command to configure a route map entry, and to specify whether the device will

process or discard matching routes and BGP update messages.

The switch uses a name to identify the route map, and a sequence number to identify each

entry in the route map.

The route-map command puts you into route-map configuration mode. In this mode, you

can use the following:

■

one or more of the match commands to create match clauses. These specify what

routes or update messages match the entry.

■

one or more of the set commands to create set clauses. These change the attributes of

matching routes or update messages.

Use the no variant of this command to delete a route map or to delete an entry from a

route map.

Syntax route-map <mapname> {deny|permit} <seq>

no route-map <mapname>

no route-map <mapname> {deny|permit} <seq>

Parameter

Description

A name to identify the route map.

deny

The route map causes a routing process to discard matching routes

or BGP update messages.

permit

<seq>

The route map causes a routing process to use matching routes or

BGP update messages.

<1-65535> The sequence number of the entry. You can use this

parameter to control the order of entries in this route map.

Mode Global Configuration

Usage Route maps allow you to control and modify routing information by filtering routes and

setting route attributes. You can apply route maps when the device:

■

processes BGP update messages that it has received from a peer

prepares BGP update messages to send to peers

redistributes routes from one routing protocol into another

redistributes static routes into routing protocols

uses BGP route flap dampening

When a routing protocol passes a route or update message through a route map, it checks

the entries in order of their sequence numbers, starting with the lowest numbered entry.

If it finds a match on a route map with an action of permit, then it applies any set clauses

and accepts the route. Having found a match, the route is not compared against any

further entries of the route map.

If it finds a match on a route map with an action of deny, it will discard the matching route.

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.201

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

If it does not find a match, it discards the route or update message. This means that route

maps end with an implicit deny entry. To permit all non-matching routes or update

messages, end your route map with an entry that has an action of permit and no match

clause.

Examples To enter route-map mode for entry 1 of the route map called route1, and then add a

match and set clause to it, use the commands:

configure terminal

route-map route1 permit 1

match as-path 60

awplus#

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-route-map)#

set weight 70

To enter route-map mode for entry 2 of the route map called route1, and then add a

match and set clause to it, use the commands:

configure terminal

route-map route1 permit 2

match interface vlan2

set metric 20

awplus#

awplus(config)#

awplus(config-route-map)#

Note how the prompt changes when you go into route map configuration mode.

To make the device process non-matching routes instead of discarding them, add a

command like the following one:

route-map route1 permit 100

awplus(config)#

Related Commands bgp dampening (BGP)

neighbor default-originate (BGP)

neighbor route-map (BGP)

neighbor unsuppress-map (BGP)

network (BGP)

redistribute (into BGP) (BGP)

show ip bgp route-map (BGP)

show route-map (Route Map)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.202

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

set as-path (Route Map)

Use this command to add an AS path set clause to a route map entry.

When a BGP update message matches the route map entry, the device prepends the

specified Autonomous System Number (ASN) or ASNs to the update’s AS path attribute.

The AS path attribute is a list of the autonomous systems through which the

announcement for the prefix has passed. As prefixes pass between autonomous systems,

each autonomous system adds its ASN to the beginning of the list. This means that the AS

path attribute can be used to make routing decisions.

Use the no variant of this command to remove the set clause.

Syntax set as-path prepend <1-65535> [<1-65535>]...

no set as-path prepend [<1-65535> [<1-65535>]...]

Parameter

Description

prepend

Prepends the autonomous system path.

<1-65535>

The number to prepend to the AS path. If you specify multiple ASNs,

separate them with spaces.

Mode Route-map mode

Usage Use the set as-path command to specify an autonomous system path. By specifying the

length of the AS-Path, the device influences the best path selection by a neighbor. Use the

prependparameter with this command to prepend an AS path string to routes

increasing the AS path length.

This command is valid for BGP update messages only.

Example To use entry 3of the route map called myrouteto prepend ASN 8and 24to the AS path

of matching update messages, use the commands:

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

route-map myroute permit 3

set as-path prepend 8 24

awplus(config-route-map)#

Related Commands match as-path (Route Map)

show route-map (Route Map)

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

C613-50032-01 REV D

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

3.203

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

set community (Route Map)

Use this command to add a community set clause to a route map entry.

When a BGP update message matches the route map entry, the device takes one of the

following actions:

■

changes the update’s community attribute to the specified value or values, or

adds the specified community value or values to the update’s community attribute, if

you specify the additive parameter after specifying another parameter. or

■

removes the community attribute from the update, if you specify the none parameter

Use the no variant of this command to remove the set clause.

Syntax set community {[<1-65535>][AA:NN] [internet] [local-AS]

[no-advertise] [no-export] [additive]}

no set community {[AA:NN] [internet] [local-AS] [no-advertise]

[no-export] [additive]}

set community none

no set community none

Parameter

Description

<1-65535>

The AS number of the community as an integer not in AA:NN

format.

AA:NN

The Autonomous System (AS) number of the community, in AA:NN

format. AS numbers are assigned to the regional registries by the

IANA (www.iana.org) and can be obtained from the registry in

your region.

AA and NN are both integers from 1 to 65535.

AA is the AS number; NN is a value chosen by the ASN administrator.

local-AS

internet

The community of routes that must not be advertised to external

BGP peers (this includes peers in other members’ Autonomous

Systems inside a BGP confederation).

The community of routes that can be advertised to all BGP peers.

no-advertise The community of routes that must not be advertised to other BGP

peers.

no-export

The community of routes that must not be advertised outside a BGP

confederation boundary (a standalone Autonomous System that is

not part of a confederation should be considered a confederation

itself).

none

The device removes the community attribute from matching update

messages.

additive

The device adds the specified community value to the update

message’s community attribute, instead of replacing the existing

attribute. By default this parameter is not included, so the device

replaces the existing attribute.

Mode Route-map Configuration

Software Reference Supplement for SwitchBlade® x8112, x908, x900 and x610 Series Switches

3.204

AlliedWare Plus Operating System - Software Version 5.4.3-2.6

C613-50032-01 REV D

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BGP and BGP4+ Commands

Usage This command is valid for BGP update messages only.

Examples To use entry 3of the route map called rmap1to put matching routes into the no-

advertise community, use the commands:

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

route-map rmap1 permit 3

set community no-advertise

awplus(config-route-map)#

To use entry 3of the route map called rmap1to put matching routes into several

communities, use the commands:

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

route-map rmap1 permit 3

set community 10:01 23:34 12:14

no-export

awplus(config-route-map)#

To use entry 3of the route map called rmap1to put matching routes into a single AS

community numbered 16384, use the commands:

configure terminal

awplus#

awplus(config)#

route-map rmap1 permit 3

set community 16384 no-export

awplus(config-route-map)#

Related Commands match community (Route Map)